You are on page 1of 229

PCS-931_MY

Line Differential Relay


Instruction Manual

Nanjing Nari-Relays Electric Co., Ltd.


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Preface

Introduction

This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NARI-RELAYS is dispatched separately from


manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided
to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the
recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

z Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

z Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

z Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

z Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD i


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

DANGER!

It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

WARNING!

It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION!

It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.

WARNING!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

WARNING!

During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.

Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.

In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

DANGER!

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.

WARNING!

ii NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

z Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous

z Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION!

z Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

z Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

z Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

z Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

z External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

z Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Manual: V1.00 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
P/N: EN_XLBH5104.0060.1101 69 SuYuan. Avenue, Nanjing 211102China
Copyright NR 2009. All rights reserved
Tel: 86-25-87178185, Fax: 86-25-87178208
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information Website: www.nari-relays.com
contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and Email: international@nari-relays.com
dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where
expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,


and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or
improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without
notice.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Table of Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................................................... i

Introduction........................................................................................................................ i

Health and Safety .............................................................................................................. i

Instructions and Warnings ...............................................................................................ii

Table of Contents .....................................................................................................................iv


Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................1

1.1 Application ...................................................................................................................1

1.2 Function .......................................................................................................................2

1.3 Features........................................................................................................................3

Chapter 2 Technical Data .........................................................................................................5

2.1 Electrical Specifications .............................................................................................5

2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings.........................................................................................5

2.1.2 Power Supply .....................................................................................................5

2.1.3 Binary Input .......................................................................................................6

2.1.4 Binary Output.....................................................................................................6

2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler ...........................................................6

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ..........................................................................................6

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range ..............................................................7

2.4 Communication Port ...................................................................................................7

2.4.1 Communication Port for RTU/SCADA .............................................................7

2.4.2 Communication Port for Print ..........................................................................8

2.4.3 RS-485 for Clock Synchronization ...................................................................8

2.5 Type Tests ....................................................................................................................8

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ..........................................................................................8

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ...............................................................................................8

2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................8

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility .........................................................................9

2.6 Certifications ..............................................................................................................10

iv NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

2.7 Protective Functions .................................................................................................10

2.7.1 Optical Interface ..............................................................................................10

2.7.2 Fault Detector ..................................................................................................10

2.7.3 Current Differential Protection ....................................................................... 11

2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection .............................................................................. 11

2.7.5 Distance Protection ......................................................................................... 11

2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection ..................................... 11

2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection .................................................... 11

2.7.8 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection ................................... 11

2.7.9 Breaker Failure Protection ..............................................................................12

2.7.10 Transient Overreach ......................................................................................12

2.7.11 Fault Locator ..................................................................................................12

2.7.12 Auto-Reclosing ..............................................................................................12

Chapter 3 Protection Description ..........................................................................................13

3.1 General Description ..................................................................................................13

3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD) ....................................................................13

3.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element ............................................................................13

3.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element.............................................................14

3.2.3 Auxiliary Voltage Element ...............................................................................14

3.2.4 Transfer Trip Element ......................................................................................15

3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD) .................................................................15

3.4 DPFC Distance Protection ........................................................................................15

3.5 Current Differential Protection .................................................................................16

3.5.1 Application .......................................................................................................16

3.5.2 Function Description.......................................................................................17

3.5.3 Logic Scheme ..................................................................................................28

3.6 Overcurrent Protection .............................................................................................35

3.6.1 Application .......................................................................................................35

3.6.2 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection .....................................35

3.6.3 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection ....................................................37

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD v


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

3.6.4 Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection ....................................38

3.6.5 Overcurrent Protection when VT Circuit Failure...........................................40

3.7 Distance Protection ...................................................................................................40

3.7.1 Distance Element with Memorized Polarization ............................................41

3.7.2 Phase-to-ground Distance Element ...............................................................43

3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element ..................................................................46

3.7.4 Reversal Distance Element .............................................................................46

3.7.5 Blinder Scheme ...............................................................................................47

3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR) .....................................................47

3.7.7 Scheme Logic ..................................................................................................49

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................................51

3.8.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................51

3.8.2 Function Description.......................................................................................51

3.8.3 Logic Scheme ..................................................................................................51

3.9 Switch onto Fault Protection ....................................................................................52

3.9.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection ....................................................................53

3.9.2 Distance SOTF Protection ..............................................................................54

3.10 Fault Phase Selection (FPS) ...................................................................................54

3.10.1 FPS Based on Deviation of Operation Voltage ...........................................54

3.10.2 FPS Based on Differential Current ...............................................................55

3.10.3 FPS Based on Phase Difference between I0 and I2A ...................................55

3.11 Pole Disagreement ..................................................................................................56

3.11.1 PD State by Single-phase Trip ......................................................................56

3.11.2 PD State by Three-phase Trip .......................................................................57

3.12 Trip Scheme .............................................................................................................57

3.13 Synchronism Check ................................................................................................63

3.13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................63

3.13.2 Function Description.....................................................................................63

3.13.3 Logic Scheme ................................................................................................64

3.14 Automatic Reclosure ...............................................................................................65

vi NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

3.14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................65

3.14.2 Function Description.....................................................................................66

3.15 Transfer Trip And Transfer Signal ..........................................................................69

3.15.1 Transfer Trip ...................................................................................................70

3.15.2 Transfer signal ...............................................................................................70

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision .........................................................................................71

4.1 General Description ..................................................................................................71

4.2 Understand the Alarms..............................................................................................71

4.3 Relay Self-supervision ..............................................................................................74

4.3.1 Fault Detection Check .....................................................................................74

4.3.2 Trip Output Circuit Check ...............................................................................74

4.3.3 Settings Check.................................................................................................74

4.4 AC Input Monitoring ..................................................................................................74

4.4.1 Voltage and Current Drift Auto Regulation ....................................................74

4.4.2 DSP Sampling Monitoring...............................................................................75

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ..................................................................................75

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ...................................................................75

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ...........................................................................75

4.5.3 Bus VT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................75

4.5.4 Line VT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................76

4.5.5 CT Circuit Supervision ....................................................................................76

4.5.6 Binary Input Supervision ................................................................................77

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording .......................................................................................79

5.1 Metering......................................................................................................................79

5.2 Event & Fault Record ................................................................................................81

5.2.1 General Description ........................................................................................81

5.2.2 Event Recorder ................................................................................................81

5.2.3 Disturbance Recorder .....................................................................................82

5.2.4 Present Recording...........................................................................................83

Chapter 6 Hardware Description ...........................................................................................85

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD vii


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

6.1 General Description ..................................................................................................85

6.2 Typical Wiring ............................................................................................................86

6.3 Plug-in Modules .........................................................................................................89

6.3.1 MON Module ....................................................................................................89

6.3.2 DSP Module (Protection Function Calculation) ............................................91

6.3.3 DSP Module (Fault Detector Logic Calculation) ...........................................91

6.3.4 AI Module .........................................................................................................92

6.3.5 GOOSE Module ................................................................................................94

6.3.6 BI Module .........................................................................................................98

6.3.7 BO Module .....................................................................................................105

6.3.8 BO Module .....................................................................................................106

6.3.9 BO Module .....................................................................................................108

6.3.10 BO Module ................................................................................................... 110

6.3.11 BO Module .................................................................................................... 111

6.3.12 PWR Module................................................................................................. 112

6.4 Display Panel ........................................................................................................... 114

Chapter 7 Configurable Function ........................................................................................ 115

7.1 General Description ................................................................................................ 115

7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software .......................................................................... 115

7.3 Protective Device Configuration ............................................................................ 115

7.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators .................................................................. 115

7.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input ....................................................................... 116

7.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output .................................................................... 117

Chapter 8 Settings ................................................................................................................ 119

8.1 Equipment Parameters............................................................................................ 119

8.2 System Parameters .................................................................................................121

8.3 Protection Settings ..................................................................................................122

8.4 Logic Settings ..........................................................................................................136

8.5 Equipment VEBI Settings........................................................................................143

8.6 GOOSE VEBI Settings .............................................................................................143

viii NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface ...................................................................................145

9.1 Overview...................................................................................................................145

9.1.1 Keypad Operation ..........................................................................................146

9.1.2 LED Indications .............................................................................................146

9.1.3 Communication Port .....................................................................................148

9.1.4 Communication .............................................................................................148

9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ..............................................................................149

9.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................149

9.2.2 VALUES ..........................................................................................................152

9.2.3 REPORT .........................................................................................................152

9.2.4 PRINT..............................................................................................................153

9.2.5 SETTINGS ......................................................................................................154

9.2.6 LOCAL CONTROL .........................................................................................154

9.2.7 CLOCK ............................................................................................................155

9.2.8 VERSION ........................................................................................................155

9.2.9 TEST_MODE ..................................................................................................155

9.2.10 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................156

9.3 Understand the LCD Display ..................................................................................156

9.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................156

9.3.2 Normal Status Display...................................................................................156

9.3.3 Display Fault Report......................................................................................157

9.3.4 Display Self-supervision Report ..................................................................159

9.3.5 Display Binary Input Change Report ...........................................................160

9.3.6 Display Control Report .................................................................................164

9.4 Keypad Operation ....................................................................................................164

9.4.1 View Device Status ........................................................................................164

9.4.2 View Device Report .......................................................................................164

9.4.3 View Module Information ..............................................................................165

9.4.4 Print Device Report .......................................................................................165

9.4.5 View Device Setting .......................................................................................166

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD ix


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting ...................................................................................167

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting ......................................................................................169

9.4.8 Switch Setting Group ....................................................................................169

9.4.9 Delete Device Message .................................................................................170

9.4.10 Modify Device Clock....................................................................................170

9.4.11 Check Software Version ..............................................................................170

9.4.12 Communication Test ...................................................................................171

Chapter 10 Communications ...............................................................................................173

10.1 General Description...............................................................................................173

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ................................................................173

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface ..........................................................................................173

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ........................................................................................175

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ................................................................176

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ...........................................................176

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer .........................................................176

10.3.2 Initialization ..................................................................................................176

10.3.3 Time Synchronization .................................................................................177

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ...................................................................................177

10.3.5 General Interrogation ..................................................................................177

10.3.6 General Service ...........................................................................................177

10.3.7 Disturbance Records ..................................................................................178

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ..............................................................178

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .....................................................178

10.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................178

10.5.2 Communication profiles .............................................................................179

10.5.3 Server data organization .............................................................................180

10.5.4 Server features and configuration .............................................................182

10.5.5 ACSI Conformance ......................................................................................184

10.5.6 Logical Nodes ..............................................................................................188

10.6 GOOSE Service ......................................................................................................191

x NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction ...................................................................................191

10.6.2 GOOSE Function .........................................................................................191

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning ......................................................................193

11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................193

11.2 Safety Information .................................................................................................193

11.3 Overview .................................................................................................................195

11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment ........................................195

11.5 Installing The Protective Device ...........................................................................196

11.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................196

11.5.2 Dimensions ..................................................................................................197

11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................197

11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................198

11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device .............................................................199

11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation......................................................199

11.5.7 Making the electrical connections .............................................................200

11.6 Check the External Circuit ....................................................................................201

11.7 Energizing The Protective Device ........................................................................202

11.8 Setting The Protective Device ..............................................................................203

11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication ...................................204

11.10 Verifying Settings by Secondary Injection ........................................................204

11.10.1 Insulation Test (if required) .......................................................................205

11.10.2 AC Measurement Check ............................................................................205

11.10.3 Print Fault Report ......................................................................................206

11.10.4 On-load Checks .........................................................................................206

11.11 Final Check ...........................................................................................................207

Chapter 12 Maintenance ......................................................................................................209

12.1 Appearance Check ................................................................................................209

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ...................................................................................209

12.3 Replace Failed Modules ........................................................................................210

12.4 Replace Button Battery ......................................................................................... 211

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD xi


PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

12.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 211

12.6 Storage ................................................................................................................... 211

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal ......................................................................213

13.1 Decommissioning ..................................................................................................213

13.2 Disposal..................................................................................................................213

Chapter 14 Manual Version History.....................................................................................215

xii NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Application

The PCS-931 is a digital EHV line differential relay with the main and back-up protection functions,
which mainly is designed for transmission line of 220KV and above.

PCS-931 Optical fibre channel PCS-931

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-931

The main protection of PCS-931 comprises of current differential protection, which can clear the
fault immediately for the whole line. DPFC distance protection can reach to extremely fast speed
for the fault near the busbar.

The back-up protection of PCS-931 comprises of distance protection, directional zero-sequence


overcurrent protection, inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection, directional phase
overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection. Specially, one zone reversal distance
protection is also available in PCS-931. In addition, as a substitution, phase/zero-sequence
overcurrent protections are put into service automatically when VT circuit is failure.

Figure 1.1-2 Functional diagram of PCS-931

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 1


Chapter 1 Introduction

PCS-931 can implement single-phase or three-phase trip and configurable auto-reclosing that can
implement 1-pole AR, 3-poles AR and 1/3-pole AR.

1.2 Function

1. Main protection

Current differential protection (87)

z DPFC current differential element

z Steady-state current differential element

z Zero-sequence current differential element

DPFC distance protection (21D)

2. Backup protection

Phase-to-phase distance protection (21P)

Phase-to-ground distance protection (21G)

Reversal distance protection (21R)

Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection (67G)

Instantaneous zero-sequence overcurrent protection (50G)

Definite-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection (51G)

Directional phase overcurrent protection (67P)

Definite-time phase overcurrent protection (51P)

Inverse-time phase overcurrent protection (IDMT)

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection (IDMT)

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51PVT)

Zero-sequence overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51GVT)

Switch onto fault (SOTF)

z Distance protection for SOTF

z Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection for SOTF

3. Additional function

Power swing blocking releasing (PSBR)

Auto-reclosing (79)

2 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Introduction

Synchronism check (25)

VT circuit supervision (VTS)

CT circuit supervision (CTS)

Line VT circuit supervision (LVTS)

Self diagnostic test

Voltage and current drift auto regulation

Fault location (FL)

Fault phase selection (FPS)

Note!

DPFC is the abbreviation of Deviation of Power Frequency Component. In case of a fault


in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the power frequency
components before the fault, the power frequency variables during the fault and the
transient variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.

1.3 Features

1. Protection and Control

It adopts the new UAPC hardware platform of NR, and its AC inputs can support the electric
instrument transformer and conventional instrument transformer.

It adopts the high performance MCU and DSP processors, high-speed inner bus and
intelligent I/O interfaces. The modularization design of the hardware and software makes this
device be configured to meet the demands of different practical application, and it is very
convenient for maintenance.

High precision 16 bits A/D converter is adopted in this protection device.

This protection device can communicate with SAS or RTU, optional communication protocol:
IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850

Quickly clearing the internal fault for whole line, the time is less than 10 ms for fault where is
near the busbar, is less than 15ms for fault where is in the center of line and is less than 25ms
for fault where is in the remote end.

Plug connectors from the relay rear panel to the terminal blocks on the rack or cabinet, which
makes the on-site commissioning and replacement much easier than what you do the
commissioning using the traditional screw terminals on the rear panel.

Two independent data acquisition paths, one for fault detector element and another for
protections and logic functions, to prevent any undesired trip.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 3


Chapter 1 Introduction

The unique DPFC distance element is integrated in the protective device, which can clear the
internal fault quickly with high sensitivity and high speed and is not affected by power swing.

Self-adaptive floating threshold which only reflects deviation of power frequency component
can defend system imbalance and system disturbance. Hence, it is both rather reliable and
very fast, and it is very sensitive but does not pickup frequently.

Main protection adopts integral transform to ensure high-speed; Back-up protection adopts
Fourier transform, which has an excellent filtering result, to ensure accuracy.

24 samples per cycle, all task including data measurement, protection calculation, logic
discrimination, event recording and protection logic calculation could be done within one
sampling period.

GPS clock synchronization PPS (pulse per second), PPM (pulse per minute) and IRIG-B
synchronization

High-speed 2048kbit/s multiplex channel or dedicated channel

2. Communication

2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization

2~4 optional Ethernet ports, IEC 61850, or IEC 60870-5-103 over TCP/IP

2 optional Ethernet port via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface)

3. Monitoring and Metering

Event Recorder including 1024 tripping report, 1024 binary input change reports, 1024
self-supervision reports and 1024 control reports.

Disturbance recorder including 64 fault reports with waveforms (The file format of disturbance
recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

Self diagnostic test

4. User Interface

Friendly HMI interface with 320240-dot LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

1 RS-232 communication rear ports for printer

Multi-language - English, Chinese, Russian option

Auxiliary software - PCSPC

4 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings


1. Analog current

Standard IEC 60255-27:2005


Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency 505Hz, 605Hz
Rated Current 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In 4In
-for 10s 30In 30In
-for 1s 100In 100In
-for half a cycle 250In 250In
Burden < 0.2VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In

2. Analog voltage

Standard IEC 60255-6:1988


Rated Voltage (Un) 100V, 110V 200V
Linear to 0.01Un~1.7Un 0.01Un~1.7Un
Thermal withstand
-continuously 2Un 1.1Un
-10s 2.6Un 1.9Un
-1s 3Un 2.1Un
Burden at rated < 0.25VA/phase @Un

2.1.2 Power Supply


Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated Voltage 110V/125V, 220V/250V
Variation 80%Un~120%Un
Permissible AC ripple
15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
voltage
Voltage short
100ms for interruption without de-energizing
interruptions
Voltage dips Up to 10s for dips 40%Un without reset
Burden
Quiescent condition <20W
Operating condition <25W

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 5


Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.1.3 Binary Input


Rated Voltage (Un) 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V, 250V
Maximal pickup
70%Un
voltage
Minimum dropout
55%Un
voltage
Maximum permissible
120%Un
voltage
Withstand 2000VAC, 3000VDC
Resolving time for
<1ms
logic input

2.1.4 Binary Output


Item Tripping contact Signal contact
Output mode Potential free contact
8A@250V AC
Continuous carry 8A
5A@30V DC
Pickup time <5ms <10ms
Breaking capacity 0.05A@110V DC resistance 0.2A@220V DC resistance
Making capacity
2000VA 3040VA
(L/R=40ms)
Maximal system 250V AC 380V AC
voltage 30V DC 250V DC
Test voltage across
1000V RMS for 1min 1200V RMS for 1min
open contact
Short duration current 30A@0.5S 35A@0.5S

2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler


Standard IEC 60255-1
Rated Voltage 24V
Rated Current 200mA
Maximal current 500mA

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions
482.6177291 (unit: mm)
(WHD)
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning
450179, M6 screw
dimensions (WH)
Housing color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 20kg

6 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Display language English


Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Protection class
Standard IEC 60225-1:2007
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection
IP20
terminals

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard IEC 60225-1:2007


Operating
-25C to +55C
temperature
Transport and storage
-40C to +70C
temperature range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, condensation not permissible

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 Communication Port for RTU/SCADA


Port number 2
Baud rate 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
Transmission distance <1000m@4800bps
Electrical Maximal capacity 32
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Port number 2
RS-485
Connector type ST
(EIA)
Baud rate 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
Transmission standard 100Base-FX
Optical Transmission distance <1500m
(Optional) Optical fibre type Multi-mode fibre
Wave length 850/820nm
Fibre size 62.5/125m (core DIA/cladding DIA)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103: 1997
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Port number 2
Ethernet Electrical Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 7


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Transmission standard 100Base-TX


Transmission distance <100m
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103: 1997 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Port number 2
Connector type SC
Transmission rate 100Mbits
Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Transmission distance <1500m
Optical
Optical fibre type Multi-mode or single-mode
(Optional)
Wave length 853/1310nm for multi-mode
1310/1550nm for single-mode
Fibre size 62.5/125m (core DIA/cladding DIA)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103: 1997 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.2 Communication Port for Print


Prot number 1
Baud Rate 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
RS-232 (EIA)
Printer type EPSON 300K printer
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 RS-485 for Clock Synchronization


Port number 1
Transmission distance <500m
RS-485 (EIA) Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test Per IEC60068-2-1:2007


Dry heat test Per IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic Per IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration Per IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I


Shock and bump Per IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Standard IEC 60255-27:2005

8 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min


Standard IEC 60255-5:2000
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100M@500VDC
measurements

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility


1MHz burst Per IEC 60255-22-1:2007
disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5KV
Differential mode: class III 1.0KV
Electrostatic Per IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
Radio frequency Per IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
interference tests Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=801000MHz
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
Fast transient Per IEC 60255-22-4:2008
disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
Surge immunity test Per IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Common mode: 2kV
Differential mode: 1kV
Conducted RF Per IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Electromagnetic Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Per IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Magnetic Field
class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
Immunity
Pulse Magnetic Field Per IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Immunity class V, 6.4/16s, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-10:2001
magnetic field
class V, 100kHz & 1MHz100A/m
immunity

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 9


Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.6 Certifications

z ISO9001: 2000

z ISO14001:2004

z OHSAS18001: 1999

z ISO10012:2003

z CMMI L3

z EMC: 89/336/EEC, EN50263:2000

z Products safety(PS): 73/23/EEC, EN61010-1: 2001, EN60950: 2002

2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Optical Interface


Using multiplex channel or dedicated channel and transmission distance is smaller than 40kM,
PCS-931 is equipped with 1310nm laser emitter.

FO type: Single mode, CCITT Rec.G652, 1310nm

Send power: -14.02.0 dBm

Receive sensitivity: -35 dBm

Maximum transmission distance: <40kM

Optical overload point: >-8 dBm

Using dedicated channel and transmission distance is greater than 40kM, PCS-931 is equipped
with 1550nm laser emitter.

FO type: Single mode, CCITT Rec.G652, 1550nm

Send power: -14.02.0 dBm

Receive sensitivity: -35 dBm

Maximum transmission distance: <100kM

Optical overload point: >-8 dBm

2.7.2 Fault Detector


2.7.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element

Setting range: 0.1In~0.5In

Accuracy: 2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

10 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.7.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

Setting range: 0.1In~0.5In

Accuracy: 2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.3 Current Differential Protection


Current setting accuracy: 5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay accuracy: <5ms

Typical operating time: <25ms

2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection


Setting range: 0.1~7.5 (In=5A), 0.5~37.5 (In=1A)

Operating time: <10ms (UOP>2UZ)

2.7.5 Distance Protection


Setting range: 0.01~25 (In=5A), 0.05~125 (In=1A)

Accuracy: 5% or 0.1 whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: 1%Setting+40ms

Operating time: 20ms (Zone 1)

2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection


Setting range: 0.1In~20In

Accuracy: 5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: 1%Setting+40ms

2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection


Setting range: 0.1In~20In

Accuracy: 5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: 1%Setting+40ms

2.7.8 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection


Setting range: 0.1In~20In

Accuracy: 5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0.5s~10s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 11


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Accuracy: 5% of reference (calculated) value +2%


current tolerance, respectively 40ms

2.7.9 Breaker Failure Protection


Time delay: 0.01s~10s

Accuracy: 1%Setting+40ms

2.7.10 Transient Overreach


Tolerance for all high-speed protection: 2%

2.7.11 Fault Locator


Accuracy for multi-phase faults with one end source: < 2.5%

Tolerance will be higher in case of single-phase fault with high ground resistance.

2.7.12 Auto-Reclosing
Item Range Accuracy
Frequency difference 0.01~1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
Phase difference 0~89 deg 2.0 deg
Voltage difference 0.02~0.8Un 1.0% Un

Item Range Accuracy


Reclosing time 0.01~50
Reclosing pulse length 0.01~50
Time of circuit breaker in closed state before AR ready 0.01~250
0.5%10ms
Maximal waiting time of the synchronism check 0.01~250
Check time of AR unsuccessful 0.01~250
Reset time 0.01~250

12 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.1 General Description

Designing hardware platform of PCS-931 based on the dual processor (DSP and CPU), two
independent fault detector elements are provided for each protection logic, i.e. GFD (general fault
detector element) and PFD (protective fault detector element).

GFD is used to control the output circuit of the protective device. PFD is used to trigger the
calculation of protective elements. Under the normal condition, the positive pole of DC power
supplied to tripping outputs is continually supervised by GFD, and the output circuit will be
switched on for tripping or reclosing only when GFD operates. It means that the relay will have the
capability to output a final tripping or reclosing signal while both GFD and PFD operate.

3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD)

Main part of GFD is DPFC overcurrent fault detector element that reflects the deviation of
phase-to-phase power frequency current, and zero-sequence overcurrent fault detector element
that reflects total current is taken as supplementary.

The GFD comprise of the following elements:

DPFC overcurrent element

Zero-sequence overcurrent element

Auxiliary voltage element

Transfer trip element

If any of the above fault detector elements operates, the GFD will operate to provide DC power
supply to the output relays to enable the output circuit.

3.2.1 DPFC Overcurrent Element


This element adopts adaptive floating threshold which consists of unbalanced output of deviation.
The adaptive floating threshold is kept higher than the unbalanced output all along, which makes it
not pick up frequently and have an extremely high sensitivity and reliability. By using adaptive
floating threshold, the unbalanced output value is small under normal condition, so this element
has extremely high sensitivity. When power swing occurs, the adaptive floating threshold
increases while the sensitivity decreases automatically, so it is not influenced by power swing
condition and need not be controlled by power swing blocking element.

Its criterion:

IMAX>1.25ITh+ISet (Equation 3.2-1)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 13


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Where:

IMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current

ISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [I_DPFC_OC_FD])

ITh: The floating threshold value

If operating condition is met, DPFC overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power supply
for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept 7 seconds after DPFC overcurrent element drops
out.

3.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element


This element will operate when both 3I0 and 3I0Cal are greater than the setting [I_ROC_FD].

Where:

3I0: zero-sequence current derived at the neutral current circuit from three-phase currents

3I0Cal: zero-sequence current calculated depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (i.e.
3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC)

If operating condition is met, zero-sequence overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power
supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept 7 seconds after zero-sequence overcurrent
element drops out.

When CT circuit failure is detected, this element will be disabled and an alarm [Alm_CTS] will be
issued.

Note!

The zero-sequence current should be connected to the protective device; otherwise all
protection elements corresponding with zero-sequence current will be blocked.

3.2.3 Auxiliary Voltage Element


Because DPFC overcurrent element and zero-sequence overcurrent element might not operate in
some special cases, in order to ensure protection device pick up in following three conditions,
PCS-931 provides auxiliary voltage element.

1. Internal fault associated with high fault resistance

2. In the case of weak infeed, internal unearthing fault

3. In the case of VT circuit failure or no VT connection, internal unearthing fault

The auxiliary voltage element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay and pickup
signal will be kept 7 seconds after auxiliary voltage element drops out.

Note!

Here UN is the rated secondary phase voltage of VT. UNN is the rated secondary

14 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

phase-to-phase voltage of VT. (UN means phase voltage; UNN means phase-to-phase

voltage)

3.2.4 Transfer Trip Element


If the logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] is set as 0 and the transfer trip signal received from opposite
end of line, the transfer trip element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay and
pickup signal will be kept 500ms after transfer trip element drops out.

3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD)

The protective fault detection element is the same as the general fault detection element.

3.4 DPFC Distance Protection

The power system is normally treated as a balanced symmetrical three-phase network. When a
fault occurs in the power system, by applying the principle of superposition, the load currents and
voltage can be calculated in the system prior to the fault and the pure fault component can be
calculated by whole fault current or voltage subtracted by load current or voltage. DPFC distance
protection reflects deviation of power frequency, therefore, only pure fault current and voltage is
useful to DPFC distance protection which is not influenced by load current and voltage.

For forward direction fault

jX

ZZD
ZK

R
ZS+ZK

-ZS

Figure 3.4-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: The setting of distance protection

ZS: Total impedance between local system and protective device location

ZK: Measurement impedance

Figure 3.4-1 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 15


Chapter 3 Protection Description

a fault occurs in forward direction, which is the circle with the Zs as the center and theZs+Zzd
as the radius. When measured impedance Zk is in the circle, the DPFC distance element will
operate. The DPFC distance element has a large capability of enduring fault resistance. When
there is infeed current from power source at the other end in the fault resistance, the phase of IN
is the same as I and the phase of voltage of fault resistance is same as I, so the fault resistance
appears resistive and is in parallel with R axes. The overreaching problem that results from infeed
current can be prevented.

For reverse direction fault

Figure 3.4-2 Operation characteristic for reverse fault

Z'STotal impedance between remote system and protective device location

Figure 3.4-2 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when
a fault occurs in reverse direction, which is the circle with the Z's as the center and the Z's-Zzd
as the radius. The region of operation is in the quadrant 1 but the measured impedance Zk is
always in the quadrant 3, so the DPFC distance element will not operate and have the definite
directionality.

Note!

The DPFC distance protection can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting
and binary input. Please refer to section 8.4.

3.5 Current Differential Protection

3.5.1 Application
Current differential protection can be used as main protection of EHV and HV overhead line or
cable. It includes phase-segregated current differential protection and zero-sequence current
differential protection.

Current differential protection exchanges information among ends by optical fibre channel. The

16 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

protection device can flexibly select dedicated optical fibre channel or multiplex channel. The
protection device can calculate channel delay in real time, and adjust sample instant to ensure
synchronism sampling of each end based on channel delay. The channel delay is calculated on
the premise that the routine of both directions (receiving and sending) shall be same to each other.

The communication rate used by protection device is 2048kbit/s. The maximum one-way channel
propagation delay is 20ms. A transfer trip and two transfer signals can be transmitted to the
remote end to fulfill some auxiliary functions via a communication channel.

Through capacitive current compensation, the sensitivity of current differential protection is


improved. Because capacitive current compensation depends on voltage, capacitive current
compensation will be disabled automatically if no voltage is input or VT circuit fails.

3.5.2 Function Description


Based on channel supervision function, the protection device can automatically record temporal
channel status if the channel fails which will block current differential protection automatically. The
detailed channel status, including channel delay, current from the remote end and differential
current, can be display on the LCD.

Current differential protection comprises three elements:

DPFC current differential element

Steady-state current differential element

Zero-sequence differential element

3.5.2.1 DPFC Current Differential Element (Stage 1)

Operation criteria:

IDiff > 0.75 IBias


Equation 3.5-1
IDiff > IH

Where:

IDiff : The DPFC differential current ( IDiff = &IM + &IN )

IBias : The DPFC restraint current ( IBias = IM + IN )

1.5UN
IH : Max(1.5[I_Diff], )
X C1L

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 17


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-1 Operation characteristic of DPFC current differential element (stage 1)

3.5.2.2 DPFC Current Differential Element (Stage 2)

Operation criteria:

IDiff > 0.75 IBias


Equation 3.5-2
IDiff > IQ

Where:

1.25UN
IQ : Max([I_Diff], )
X C1L

IDiff and IBias are the same as those mentioned above.

IDiff

k=1
k=0.75

IQ

IBias

Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of DPFC current differential element (stage 2)

When the above criterion is met, the stage 2 of DPFC current differential element will operate after

18 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

25ms.

3.5.2.3 Steady-state Current Differential Element (stage 1)

Operation criteria :

IDiff > 0.6 IBias


Equation 3.5-3
IDiff > IH

Where:

IDiff : The phase differential current ( IDiff = &IM + &IN )

IBias : The phase restraint current ( IBias = &IM &IN )

1.5UN
IH : Max(1.5[I_Diff], )
X C1L

Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of steady-state current differential element (stage 1)

3.5.2.4 Steady-state Current Differential Element (stage 2)

Operation criteria :

IDiff > 0.6 IBias


Equation 3.5-4
IDiff > IM

Where:

1.25UN
IM : Max([I_Diff], )
X C1L

IDiff and IBias are the same as those mentioned above.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 19


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-4 Operation characteristic of steady-state current differential element (stage 2)

When the above criterion is met, the stage 2 of steady-state differential current relay will operate
after 25ms.

3.5.2.5 Zero-sequence Current Differential Element

Zero-sequence differential current element is sensitive to high resistance ground fault.

operation criteria:

IDiff0 > 0.75 IBias0

IDiff0 > IM
Equation 3.5-5
IDiff > 0.15 IBias
IDiff > IM

Where:

IDiff0 : The zero-sequence differential current

IDiff : The phase differential current

IBias0 : The zero-sequence restraint current ( IBias0 = &IM0 &IN0 )

IM : [I_Diff]

IBias is the same to those mentioned above

20 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-5 Operation characteristic of zero-sequence current differential element

When the above criterion is met, the zero sequence differential current relay will operate after
45ms.

3.5.2.6 Capacitive Current Compensation

For the long transmission line whose capacitance current is very large, in order to increase the
sensitivity of zero-sequence current differential element when a ground fault associated with fault
resistance occurs, capacitance current must be compensated to eliminate the effect that
capacitance current has on differential current. The traditional method of compensating
capacitance current can only compensate steady-state capacitance current. However, during the
transient period, such as closing circuit breaker to no-load line, clearing external fault and so on,
there are large transient capacitance current in the line. The traditional method cannot
compensate the capacitance current completely, hence, a new method is available, which can
compensate transient component of capacitance current.

1. For long transmission line without shunt reactor

Phase capacitance current of line can be derived from equivalent circuit. For normal operation
condition, closing circuit breaker to no-load line and clearing external fault, not only steady-state
component of capacitance current but also transient component of capacitance current can be
compensated. It can improve the sensitivity of differential protection.

Figure 3.5-6 equivalent circuit

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 21


Chapter 3 Protection Description

For different system frequency, the capacitance current which is shown in above figure can be
calculated by:

duc
ic = C Equation 3.5-6
dt

Where:

ic : Capacitance current flowing through each capacitance

C : Capacitance value

u c : Voltage between both ends of capacitance

Based on the result of above equation, i.e. Equation 3.5-6, capacitance of each phase can be gained.

2. For long transmission line with shunt reactor

Because a part of capacitance current has been compensated by shunt reactor, reactance current
IL must be subtracted from capacitance current calculated by above equation, i.e. Equation 3.5-6.

Figure 3.5-7 Equivalent circuit of shunt reactor

Because the current and voltage of reactor meet the following relation:

diL (t)
UL (t) - Uf (t) = L P Equation 3.5-7
dt

To perform integral operation for Equation 3.5-7 from t to t-t, IL can be calculated by:

1 t
iL (t) = iL (t - t) +
LP [U (t) U (t)]dt
t t
L f Equation 3.5-8

Then,

duc
ic = C iL (t) Equation 3.5-9
dt

3. For short transmission line

Because capacitance current is very small, the sensitivity of current differential protection can still

22 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

meet the requirement. The function, capacitance current compensation, will be disabled
automatically if differential current is smaller than 01IN.

3.5.2.7 CT Supervision

If CT circuit failure occurs, delayed alarm will be issued. When CT circuit failure occurs on an end,
the FD and current differential protection on this end might operate at once. However, FD on
another end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of current differential relay.
Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate. Meanwhile the healthy end will
issue alarm signal [Alm_Diff_ChA] which will be treated as the same as the alarm [Alm_CTS].

However, if CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is
detected, the protective device will show two kinds of behavior.

If logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit failure) is set
as 1, the differential protection will be blocked.

If logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] is set as 0 and the differential current of the faulty phase is more
than the differential current setting [I_Diff_CTS] during CT circuit failure, the differential protection
will operate with alarm signal being issued at the same time.

3.5.2.8 CT Saturation

The incorrect operating of current differential protection would occur due to transient CT saturation
at the moment when external fault occurs. Hence, the protective device adopts high restraint
coefficient and self-adaptive floating restraint threshold, which can prevent current differential
protection from mal-operation even in serious saturation case.

3.5.2.9 Synchronous Sampling

One of the protection devices on both ends is set as reference end (the end whose ID code is
greater, [ID_Local]>[ID_Remote]) and normally called master; the device on the other end is set
as synchronous end (the end whose ID code is smaller, [ID_Local]<[ID_Remote]) and normally
called slave. The protection device exchanges information of both ends through synchronous
mode. The sampling interval of the reference end is fixed and the synchronous end will adjust
sampling interval at any time until the synchronization condition is satisfied.

The preconditions for synchronous sampling of the protection devices on both ends include:

1. The maximum time delay of the single-directional transmission of the channel 20ms.

2. The receiving and sending route of the channel shall be conformable (i.e. the transmission
time delay of the two directions shall be equivalent).

Typical adjusting method for sampling time has two steps:

1. Measure time delay of channel

Side S sends a frame of message to side M, and meanwhile records the sending time tss on the
basis of relative clock on side S. When side M receives the message, it will take the relative clock
of the device on side M as the basis to record receiving time tmr of the message, and send a
frame of message to side S at next fixed time, meanwhile take tms-tmr as the content of

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 23


Chapter 3 Protection Description

message. Side S will receive the message from side M at the time tsr and obtain tms-tmr.

Therefore, we can obtain the time delay of the channel Td through calculation:

(t sr t ss ) (t ms t mr )
Td =
2

Figure 3.5-8 Calculation schematic diagram of channel time delay

2. Measure the sampling time error of the protection devices on both ends through the slave and
adjust the slaves time of sampling pulse according to the time delay of the channel, to realize
synchronous sampling.

The master implements the sampling in fixed interval Tsm and meanwhile sends message to the
slave on the basis of internal clock of the protection device. When the slave receives the message
from the master, it can know the sampling time of the master according to the time delay of the
channel and obtain the sampling time error T of the protection devices on both ends according
to its current sampling time. It is shown in Figure 3.5-9. The slave adjusts the next sampling time to
make T0. When T is less than the error, we can think the protection devices on both ends
realize synchronous sampling.

Figure 3.5-9 Schematic diagram for synchronous sampling adjustment

3.5.2.10 Communication Channel Interface

Depending on the difference of the amount of optic fibre core and the distance permitted to

24 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

transmit, the protection device can select two modes including dedicated optical fibre channel and
multiplex channel. The multiplex channel is not recommended unless the receiver power does not
meet the requirement due to too long transmission line.

Dedicated 2048kbit/s channel is shown in Figure 3.5-10, Two fibre cores of optical cable are
dedicated to differential protection

Figure 3.5-10 Application of dedicated 2048kbit/s channel

Multiplex 2048kbit/s channel is shown in Figure 3.5-11.

Coaxial cable
Pig Tail
RX SDH Device Optic fibre
Differential communication
2048kbit/s MUX2M
Protection TX E1Interface
net
Pig Tail

Figure 3.5-11 Application of multiplex channel

3.5.2.11 Communication Clock

Data exchange is very important to digital differential protection.

The differential relay sends and receives data based on respective clock, which are called transmit
clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be extracted
from data frame, which can ensure no drop-out data code generated and no receive error data
code received. Clock TX has two options:

1) Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock. (master clock)

2) Use clock TX, which is called external clock. (slave clock)

Depend on the difference of the clock used by the differential relays of the two terminals, there are
three modes.

1. Master-master mode

Both ends use internal clock.

2. Slave-slave mode

Both ends use external clock.

3. Master-slave mode

One of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock. (Not recommended)

Depending on the logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA], current differential protection selects the
communication clock mode. The inner clock is enabled automatically when the logic setting
[En_InnClock_ChA] is set as 1. Contrarily, the outer clock is enabled automatically when the

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 25


Chapter 3 Protection Description

logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA] is set to 0.

If the protection device uses multiplex PCM channel, logic setting [En_InnClock_ChA] at both
ends should be set as 0. If the protection device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, logic
setting [En_InnClock_ChA] at both ends should be set as 1.

3.5.2.12 Identity Code

In order to ensure reliability of protection device when digital communication channel is applied,
providing settings [ID_Local] and [ID_Remote] is used as identity code to distinguish uniquely
protection device in the remote end using same channel.

During normal operation, the identity code of protection device in the end should be different with
that of protection device in the remote end. In addition, it should be different with that of protection
device used to protect other transmission line. In one word, identity code of protection device, i.e.,
the setting [ID_Local], should have uniqueness in the power grid. The setting range is from 0 to
65535. Only under the test mode, they can be set as the same.

The end of which setting [ID_Local] should be same as the [ID_Remote] of the other and the
greater [ID_Local] between the two ends is chosen as a master end for sampling synchronism, the
other is a slave end. If the setting [ID_Local] is set as same as [ID_Remote], that means the
equipment in loopback testing state.

The setting [ID_Local] is packaged in the data frame and send to the remote end of line through
channel. When [ID_Local] received by protection device is same to the setting [ID_Remote] of this
protection device, the message received comes from the remote end of line certainly and is valid,
and protection information involved in message is read. When they are not equal, the message is
thought as invalid and protection information involved in message is ignored. corresponding
alarms [Alm_ID_ChA] and [Alm_ChA] will be issued.

3.5.2.13 Channel Statistics

The protection device has the function of channel statistics and can monitor the channel status on
line. The protection device can form a channel statistic report automatically at 9:00 every day and
the report can be printed for operator to understand the channel quality. The monitoring contents
of channel status are shown as follows, and they can be gained by the menu VALUES
COMM_CH_STATE.

1. Beginning time, [Time_Start]

It shows the starting time of the channel status statistics of the protection device in the local end.

2. Master-slave mode of local device [Equip_Local]

It shows that local protection device is master or slave.

3. ID code of the remote end, [ID_Remote_ChA]

It shows the ID information received by the device on this end under present conditions.

4. Time delay of channel A, [t_Dly_ChA]

26 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

It shows the calculated data of the channel time delay of the protection device on this end under
present conditions. (unit:us)

5. Total amount of error frame of channel A, [N_CrcFail_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of the wrong frames of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

Error frame means that this frame fails in CRC check.

6. Total amount of abnormal messages of channel A, [N_FrameErr_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of abnormal messages of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

7. Total amount of loss frames of channel A, [N_FrameLoss_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of the invalid frames of the device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

8. Total amount of abnormal messages from the remote end of channel A,


[N_RemoteAbnor_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of abnormal messages received from the remote end from starting time
of channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

9. Seconds of serious error frames of channel A, [t_Second_CrcFail_ChA]

It shows the total numbers of seriously error frame seconds of the protection device on this side
from starting time of the channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if
beyond 65535)

10. Desynchronizing times of channel A, [N_LossSyn_ChA]

It shows the desynchronizing times of the protection device on this end from starting time of
channel statistics till now. (the maximum is 65535, counted again from 0 if beyond 65535)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 27


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3 Logic Scheme


3.5.3.1 Common Element

Where:

DIFF Enable (Local end): local current differential protection is enabled

DIFF Enable (Remote end): remote current differential protection is enabled

IDiff>[I_Diff] (A) &


Common differential condition (A)
IDiff>0.15IBias (A)

IDiff>[I_Diff] (B) &


Common differential condition (B)
IDiff>0.15IBias (B)

IDiff>[I_Diff] (C) &


Common differential condition (C)
IDiff>0.15IBias (C)

Where:

IDiff: differential current

IBias: restraint current

A: phase A

B: phase B

C: phase C

28 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Idiff>[I_Diff_CTS] &

[En_CTSBlkDiff ]

>=1
CT circuit failure >=1

[Alm_Diff_ChA]

&
DIFF Enable (Local end) &

DIFF Enable (Remote end)

&
Differential condition 1 (A)
Common differential condition (A)

&
Differential condition 1 (B)
Common differential condition (B)

&
Differential condition 1 (C)
Common differential condition (C)

When binary input [EBI_DiffP], virtual binary input [VEBI_DiffP] and logic setting [En_DiffP_ChA]
are all set as 1, the signal DIFF Enable is valid. They can be visible or invisible in the protection
device through configuration based on different project. If they are invisible, the signal DIFF
Enable (Local end) is valid by default.

The signal DIFF Enable (Remote end) is an information from the remote end via optical fibre
channel, which is used to indicate whether current differential protection in the remote end is
enabled or not.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 29


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.2 DPFC Differential Element (stage 1)

Differential condition 2 (A) &


Op_DPFC_Diff1 (A)
DPFC DIFF1 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


Op_DPFC_Diff1 (B)
DPFC DIFF1 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


Op_DPFC_Diff1 (C)
DPFC DIFF1 (C)

[En_DPFC_Diff1]

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (A)
>=1
Op_DPFC_Diff1 (B) Op_DPFC_Diff1

Op_DPFC_Diff1 (C)

Where:

DPFC DIFF1: stage 1 of DPFC differential element

3.5.3.3 DPFC Differential Element (stage 2)

Differential condition 2 (A) &


25ms 0ms Op_DPFC_Diff2 (A)
DPFC DIFF2 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


25ms 0ms Op_DPFC_Diff2 (B)
DPFC DIFF2 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


25ms 0ms Op_DPFC_Diff2 (C)
DPFC DIFF2 (C)

[En_DPFC_Diff2]

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (A)
>=1
Op_DPFC_Diff2 (B) Op_DPFC_Diff2

Op_DPFC_Diff2 (C)

Where:

DPFC DIFF2: stage 2 of DPFC differential element

30 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.4 Steady-state Differential Element (stage 1)

Differential condition 2 (A) &


Op_Stdy_Diff1 (A)
Steady-state DIFF1 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


Op_Stdy_Diff1 (B)
Steady-state DIFF1 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


Op_Stdy_Diff1 (C)
Steady-state DIFF1 (C)

[En_Stdy_Diff1]

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (A)
>=1
Op_Stdy_Diff1 (B) Op_Stdy_Diff1

Op_Stdy_Diff1 (C)

Where:

Steady-state DIFF1: stage 1 of steady-state differential element

3.5.3.5 Steady-state Differential Element (stage 2)

Differential condition 2 (A) &


25ms 0ms Op_Stdy_Diff2 (A)
Steady-state DIFF2 (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


25ms 0ms Op_Stdy_Diff2 (B)
Steady-state DIFF2 (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


25ms 0ms Op_Stdy_Diff2 (C)
Steady-state DIFF2 (C)

[En_Stdy_Diff2]

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (A)
>=1
Op_Stdy_Diff2 (B) Op_Stdy_Diff2

Op_Stdy_Diff2 (C)

Where:

Steady-state DIFF2: stage 2 of steady-state differential element

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 31


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.6 Zero-sequence Differential Element

Differential condition 2 (A) &


40ms 0ms Op_REF (A)
REF DIFF (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


40ms 0ms Op_REF (B)
REF DIFF (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


40ms 0ms Op_REF (C)
REF DIFF (C)

[En_REF]

Op_REF (A)
>=1
Op_REF (B) Op_REF

Op_REF (C)

3.5.3.7 Differential Inter-trip Element

Differential condition 2 (A) &


10ms 0ms Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (A)
Inter-trip element (A)

Differential condition 2 (B) &


10ms 0ms Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (B)
Inter-trip element (B)

Differential condition 2 (C) &


10ms 0ms Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (C)
Inter-trip element (C)

[En_PhSeg_RecvTT]

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (A)
>=1
Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (B) Op_PhSeg_RecvTT

Op_PhSeg_RecvTT (C)

32 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.8 Accelerated Inter-trip Element

3.5.3.9 Send Permissive Signal

At weak infeed end, current fault detector element maybe does not operate, weak infeed logic
determines whether weak infeed condition is met by distinguishing voltage and current conditions.

When three binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are all energized, the
protection device thinks circuit breaker as be in open position.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 33


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.10 Differential Protection Self-check

[BI_Send_TT] 4s 10s >=1


Alm_TT
Receiving transfer trip 4s 10s

Loss data frame (CHA) 100ms 1s &


Alm_NoValidFram_ChA
[En_DiffP_ChA]

[ID_Remote]Remote ID (CHA) 100ms 1s &


Alm_ID_ChA
[En_DiffP_ChA]

Rate of error code >10E-5 (CH A) 10s 10s &


Alm_CRC_ChA
[En_DiffP_ChA]

Loss data frame (CHA)


&
Fault detector Alm_OutDiffP_ChA

[En_DiffP_ChA]

Alm_FrameLoss_ChA
>=1
Alm_ID_ChA Alm_ChA

DiffP is out of service &


1s 4s
[En_DiffP_ChA]

Common differential condition (A)


>=1
Common differential condition (B)

Common differential condition (C)


&
10s 10s Alm_Diff_ChA
DIFF Enable (Local end) &

DIFF Enable (Remote end)

Calculated IdiffA Actual ldiffA 2s 10s Alm_CompParam_ChA

Where:

CHA: channel A

Remote ID: received ID from the remote end

DiffP: differential protection

IdiffA: differential current of channel A

34 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.11 Transfer Trip and Transfer Signal

3.6 Overcurrent Protection

3.6.1 Application
The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases
with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very
quickly for faults very close to the generation (and protective device) point, for which very high fault
currents are characteristic.

The conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance of earth-faults in most of the
cases. In some applications, especially applications with long lines, the clearance can be
improved by use of an instantaneous zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

3.6.2 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection


Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection consists of four stages zero-sequence
overcurrent elements with directionality. Only stage 1 can operate instantaneously. In the case of
stage 3 and stage 4, their directional element can be enabled or disabled by setting the logic
setting [En_Dir_ROC3] and [En_Dir_ROC4]. When logic setting [En_Dir_ROC3] or [En_Dir_ROC4]
is set as 0, stage 3 or stage 4 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection is no-directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

Each stage can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting respectively. For stage 3
and stage 4, when the accelerated tripping condition is met, they will operate to trip with a shorter
time delay (subtract 500ms) if the logic settings [En_ROC3_SOTF] and [EN_ROC4_SOTF] are set
as 1.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 35


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]
& ROC DIR+
F0+

F0-
& ROC DIR-

[En_ROC1] & Op_ROC1

3I0Cal > [I_ROC1]


&

[t_ROC2]
[En_ROC2] & Op_ROC2

3I0Cal > [I_ROC2]


&

1
[En_Dir_ROC3]

[En_ROC3]

T1 500ms
3I0Cal > [I_ROC3] &
& 1 Op_ROC3

1
&
Tripping command
&
Fault detector
&
[En_ROC4_SOTF]

1
[En_Dir_ROC4]

[En_ROC4]

T2 500ms
3I0Cal > [I_ROC4] &
& 1 Op_ROC4

1 &
Tripping command
&
Fault detector
&
[En_ROC4_SOTF]

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Where:

T1: [t_ROC3]-500ms

T2: [t_ROC4]-500ms

F0: forward zero-sequence element

36 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

F0: reverse zero-sequence element

3.6.3 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection


The overcurrent protection in this relay provides three-stage phase overcurrent protection with
independent definite-time characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled by scheme logic
settings independently. All overcurrent element and directional element settings apply to all three
phases but are independent for each stage. Configuring the relevant settings can enable or
disable the corresponding directional element.

Reverse direction

UJ
lm=-780

Forward direction

IJ

Figure 3.6-2 Operation characteristic of direction element

Where:

lm: The positive-sequence sensitive angle of line

The stage 1 and stage 2 of phase overcurrent protections are only definite-time characteristic.
However, the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection it also can be set as inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection.

When the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection also can be used as inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT) overcurrent protection, various methods are available to achieve correct relay
coordination on a system; by means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and
current. Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in
fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used by some utilities but can often
lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source substations where the fault level is
highest. For these reasons the most commonly applied characteristic in coordinating overcurrent
relays is the IDMT type. The inverse time characteristic complies with the following formula (based
on IEC60255-4 standard).


t= TP
( I / I p ) 1

Where:

= Constant

= Constant

t = Operation time

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 37


Chapter 3 Protection Description

I = Measured current

Ip is the current threshold setting; the current setting of the stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection [I_OC3] is used as the Ip in this relay. If the stage 4 overcurrent protection is used
as IDMT overcurrent protection.

Tp is the time multiplier setting; the time setting of the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection
[t_OC3] is used as the Tp in this relay. If the stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection is used as
IDMT overcurrent protection.

Three types of IDMT characteristic curves are applied in this relay. The setting [Opt_InvOC3] can
be used to select the expected curve.

Opt_InvOC3 Curve Name


1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.5 1
3 Extremely Inverse 80 2

The logic scheme of directional phase overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

VT circuit failure

Forward direction
1
[En_Dir_OC1] &
& [t_OC1]
Op_OC1
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC1]

[En_OC1]

1
[En_Dir_OC2] &
& [t_OC2]
Op_OC2
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC2]

[En_ROC2]

1
[En_Dir_OC3] &
& [t_OC3]
Op_OC3
Max(IA, IB, IC)> [I_OC3]

[En_OC3]

Figure 3.6-3 Logic diagram of directional phase overcurrent protection

3.6.4 Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection


Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is available in PCS-931, which is normal
inverse-time characteristic in accord with the specification of IEC 60255-4. Its operation criterion
is:

38 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

0.14
t(I0 ) = TP ( )
I
( 0 )0.02 1
IP

Where:

TP : Time constant, i.e. the setting [t_InvROC]

IP : Reference current, i.e. the setting [I_InvROC]

Figure 3.6-4 Normal inverse-time characteristic

According to the different value of TP, different curves of normal inverse-time characteristic are
available. The logic scheme of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is shown in the
Figure 3.6-4.

3I0Cal>[I_InvROC]
&
F0+ IDMT
& Op_InvROC
&
[En_Dir_InvROC ] 1

[En_InvROC ]

Figure 3.6-5 Logic diagram of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Where:

[t_InvROC]: Time delay of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

[I_InvROC]: Current setting of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

[En_Dir_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection


controlled by direction element

[En_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 39


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.6.5 Overcurrent Protection when VT Circuit Failure


When bus VT circuit failure happens, the distance protection will be disabled. As a substitute,
phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection will be put into work
automatically in this case if VEBI setting [VEBI_DistP] and [VEBI_ROC] are set as 1.

Figure 3.6-6 Logic diagram of zero-sequence/phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

All stages of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection are under the control of
zero-sequence overcurrent element, so the current setting for each stage should be greater than
[I_ROC_FD].

3.7 Distance Protection

The distance protection comprises 3 zones phase-to-phase distance elements, 3 zones


phase-to-ground elements which include mho characteristic and quadrilateral characteristic and 1
zone reversal distance element. When the fault with high resistance occurs, phase-to-ground
element with quadrilateral characteristic can operate correctly. In order to ensure the reliability,
phase-to-ground element with quadrilateral characteristic will operate with a longer time delay than
phase-to-ground element with mho characteristic.

For each independent distance element zone, full scheme design provides continuous
measurement of impedance separately in three independent phase-to-phase measuring loops as
well as in three independent phase-to-ground measuring loops.

Phase-to-phase distance element is suitable as a basic protection function against two- and
three-phase faults in all kinds of networks, regardless of the treatment of the neutral point.
Independent setting for each zone separately makes it possible to create fast and selective
protection in power systems.

Phase-to-ground distance element serves as basic earth fault protection in networks with solidly or
low impedance grounded networks. Independent setting for each zone separately makes it
possible to create fast and selective protection in power systems.

Polarized positive sequence voltage is used for distance protection so that faults with high
resistance can also be cleared easily. In case of short lines, in order to enhance performance
against high fault resistance, the impedance characteristic of the zone 1 and zone 2 could be

40 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

inclined toward quadrant 1.

Zero-sequence reactance character is used for phase-to-ground distance element so that


overreach due to resistance earth fault could be avoided.

If the positive sequence polarized voltage is high enough, directionality of the distance protection
using positive sequence polarized voltage is very good. However, when close-in three phase fault
happens, the positive sequence voltage may reduce to 10% or less, the distance protection will go
to low voltage program (please refer to section 3.7.1) in which memorized positive sequence
polarized voltage is used instead.

Threshold will be set forward for zones 1 and 2 of distance element before its operation, so that
directionality could be assured during busbar three phase fault. In addition, this threshold will be
changed to reverse direction after operation of the protection, so that forward close-in three phase
fault can be fully cleared. As to the zone 3 of the distance element, direction of the threshold is
always reverse, because it acts as a backup protection for busbar.

Note!

When VT circuit failure happens, the alarm [Alm_VTS] displayed, all distance protection
will be disabled.

3.7.1 Distance Element with Memorized Polarization


3.7.1.1 General Description

Distance element with memorized polarization is an algorithm used when positive sequence
voltage reduces to 10% or less. There are only two possibilities for this condition: power swing or
three phase short circuit fault.

As the power swing will be identified by power swing blocking function, only three phase short
circuit should be considered and discussed herein.

Because three phase-to-ground impedance and three phase-to-phase impedance are equal in
case of three phase short circuit fault, so only phase-to-ground impedance should be measured.

Impedances of all three phase are usually equal. Nevertheless, in order to ensure fast tripping
even in the case of transition from bus fault to three phase line fault, all of three phase impedances
are calculated and operation of any phase element will lead to three phase tripping.

3.7.1.2 Operation Characteristic

Distance element with memorized polarization compares phasor angle between operating voltage
and polarized voltage.

1. A fault in forward direction

The transient operation characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-1. Operation characteristic of ZK on


R-X plane is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and -ZS as the diameter. The origin is
enclosed in the circle.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 41


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.7-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: the setting of distance protection

ZS: total impedance between local system and protective device location

ZK: measurement impedance

This does not mean it will operate incorrectly during reverse direction fault but means it will
operate correctly during forward fault even if the fault occurs just on the outlet because that is
derived supposing forward direction fault.

2. A fault in reverse direction

Figure 3.7-2 shows operation characteristic of measured impedance -ZK on R-X plane. This
characteristic is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and Z'S as the diameter. It will operate
only when -ZK is in the circle. Therefore directionality of the protection is explicit.

Figure 3.7-2 Operation characteristic during reverse fault

Z'Stotal impedance between remote system and protective device location

42 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

The conditions mentioned above are before fading of memorized voltage, in another word, they
are transient characteristic.

jX

ZZD

ZK

Figure 3.7-3 Steady state characteristic of three phase short circuit fault

When the memorized voltage fade, Figure 3.7-3 shows operation characteristic of measured
impedance ZK on R-X plane for forward direction fault as well as that of -ZK for reverse direction
fault. Since the circle covers the origin, the equipment will be just on the margin of operation for
fault on the bus or line outlet. In order to prevent the mal-operation for bus fault, especially the
three phase bus fault with arc resistance, zone1 and 2 of distance element is equipped with a
positive threshold. Voltage value of the threshold is equal to maximum voltage drop of the arc.
Moreover, when zone 1 or 2 of distance element operates, phase of the threshold voltage will be
inverted so that the origin can be enclosed in the characteristic circle to ensure the fault can be
fully cleared. In order to ensure backup protection of zone 3, phase of threshold voltage is always
inverted and the origin is always enclosed in the characteristic circle.

3.7.2 Phase-to-ground Distance Element


3.7.2.1 Mho Phase-to-ground Distance Element

1. Zone 1/2

This element use polarized positive sequence voltage which can improve the performance against
the fault resistance so that it cannot overreach when earth fault associated with high fault
resistance occurs.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 43


Chapter 3 Protection Description

jX

1=0 ZZD 1=15 1=30

A
R

-ZS

Figure 3.7-4 Characteristic of the relay for forward fault

In short line case, in order to improve the relay performance against high fault resistance, phase
shift 1 is used for polarized voltage. This phase shift could move the directional impedance
characteristic toward quadrant 1 as is shown in Figure 3.7-4. Value of 1 can be set to 0, 15 or
30.

This relay could measure high fault resistance and keep a very satisfied performance under high
fault resistance condition. However, if there is a considerable power source in remote end, an
overreach caused by infeed from remote end during resistance earth fault may occur. In order to
prevent overreach, the following zero sequence reactance relay is introduced.

2. Zero-sequence reactance element

Typical zero-sequence reactance characteristic is shown as the straight line A in Figure 3.7-4.
Therefore, directional impedance characteristic integrating with the zero sequence characteristic
are adaptive with the fault resistance.

Actually, zero sequence reactance characteristic line will incline downward for 12. Therefore, in
an actual system, even if zero sequence impedance angles of both ends of a line are not the same
and the phase difference exists between 3I0Cal and voltage drop on fault resistance, overreach
condition will not happen. If the directional distance element with phase shift 1 and zero
sequence reactance element operate simultaneously, zones 1 and 2 of distance element with
good directionality will operate.

3. Zone 3

The no-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage because during earth
fault, positive sequence voltage is mainly formed by healthy phase and the phase of positive
sequence voltage is kept as it was before the fault. Therefore, characteristic of zone 3 of
phaseto-earth distance element is the same as the transient characteristic of distance element
with memorized polarization and have a very good directionality.

44 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.7.2.2 Quadrilateral Phase-to-ground Distance Element

The sensitivity of phase-to-ground distance element with Mho characteristic may be not enough
during ground fault with extreme high resistance. So additional three-zone phase-to-ground
distance element with quadrilateral characteristic is adopted in the equipment to compensate the
sensitivity of Mho characteristic. The logic relationship between quadrilateral distance element and
Mho distance element is OR. It means that any ground fault in one of the two operation zones will
be cleared. The quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element can significantly improve the
sensitivity to clear ground fault with extreme high resistance. The three zones of quadrilateral
characteristic can be enabled or disabled by the logic setting [En_ZPG1_Quad], [En_ZPG2_Quad]
and [En_ZPG3_Quad] respectively. The operation characteristic of quadrilateral distance element
is shown in Figure 3.7-5:

Figure 3.7-5 Operation Characteristic of quadrilateral distance element

Where:

is the phase angle of positive sequence line impedance


[R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] or [R3_Quad] is the resistance setting of corresponding zone of
quadrilateral distance protection

[Z_PG1], [Z_PG2] or [Z_PG3] are the impedance setting of corresponding zone of Mho distance
protection.

The quadrilateral characteristic is a supplement to Mho characteristic for phase-to-ground


distance protection. It is used to improve sensitivity for ground fault with high resistance. However,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 45


Chapter 3 Protection Description

if the voltage is extreme low, the directionality of quadrilateral characteristic is not clear. However,
Mho characteristic of phase-to-ground distance element using polarized positive sequence voltage
has definite directionality. Therefore, In case that phase voltage is lower than 10% of rated voltage,
the quadrilateral characteristic will be disabled automatically and the Mho characteristic is
reserved.

3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element


3.7.3.1 Zone 1/2

Zone 1,2 of phase-to-phase distance element use polarized positive sequence voltage. Phase
shift 2 is introduced here for polarized voltage in zones 1 and 2 just like 1 in case of
phase-to-ground distance element. It is used also for improving performance against high fault
resistance in short line case. Value of 2 can be set as 0 or 15or 30.

3.7.3.2 Zone 3

No-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage. Operation characteristic of


faulty phase is shown as Figure 3.7-1 and Figure 3.7-2. This element has a very good
directionality.

If three-phase short circuit fault occurs, since the polarized voltage has not been memorized, its
operation characteristic is a circle passing through the origin (Please refer to Figure 3.7-3). If the
positive sequence voltage is low, the fault will be measured by impedance element with
memorized polarization. There is neither problem about dead zone nor loss of directionality for bus
fault in this case.

3.7.4 Reversal Distance Element


When a fault occurs in the backside of the busbar, reversal distance element is provided to clear it
with defined time delay and is taken as backup protection for reversal busbar fault. Its operation
characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-6.

Figure 3.7-6 Operation characteristic of reversal distance element

46 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

ZZD is impedance setting [Z_Rev] of reversal distance element, usually, which is set to 50% of the
protected line. In order to prevent existing dead zone in the protected zone, origin is included in
the operation characteristic which is shifted 0.5 ZZD toward forward direction.

3.7.5 Blinder Scheme


The blinder characteristic shown in Figure 3.7-7 can be used to restrict the reach of a distance
relay on a long line or during heavy load conditions. The distance relay will be allowed to trip only
when both blinders are operated (i.e., the apparent impedance must be between the two
characteristics).

jX

B ZZD A

RZD RZD

Figure 3.7-7 The operation characteristic of blinder

In order to ensure distance relay not affected by load impendence, the phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground blinders are used. As shown in Figure 3.7-7, the slope of blinder is same to
positive sequence sensitivity angle , RZD is the setting [R_Blinder]. The operation region is
between line A and line B. The logic setting [En_Blinder] can decide whether the blinder is enabled
or not.

3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR)


When power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance measured by the distance
measuring element may vary from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the
distance element. The operation of the distance measuring element due to the power swing
occurs in many points of interconnected power systems. To keep the stability of whole power
system, tripping due to operation of the distance measuring element during a power swing is
generally not allowed. PCS-931 adopts releasing power swing blocking to avoid maloperation of
distance protection resulting from power swing. In another word, distance protection is blocked all
along under the normal conditions and power swing. Only if fault (internal fault or power swing with
internal fault) is detected, power swing blocking for distance protection is released by PSBR
element.

Power swing blocking for distance element will be released if any of the following PSBR elements

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 47


Chapter 3 Protection Description

operate.

Fault detector PSBR element (FD PSBR)

Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element (UF PSBR)

Symmetrical fault PSBR element (SF PSBR)

Pole disagreement PSBR element (PD PSBR)

1. Fault detector PSBR element

If any of the following condition is matched, FD PSBR will operate for 160ms.

1) Positive sequence current is lower than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault detector
element operates.

2) Positive sequence current is higher than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault
detector element operates, but the duration is less than 10ms.

2. Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element

The operation criterion:

I0+I2>mI1

The m is an internal fixed coefficient which can ensure UF PSBR operate during power swing
with internal unsymmetrical fault, while not operate during power swing or power swing with
external fault.

3. Symmetrical fault PSBR element

If a three-phase fault occurs and FD PSBR is invalid (160ms after GFD operates), neither FD
PSBR nor UF PSBR will be able to operate to release the distance protection. Thus, SF PSBR is
provided for this case specially. This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing
center:

UOS=U1COS

Where:

: the angle between positive sequence voltage and current

U1: the positive sequence voltage

The criterion of SF PSBR element comprises the following two parts:

when -0.03UN<UOS<0.08UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 150ms.

when -0.1UN<UOS<0.25UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 500ms.

4. Pole disagreement PSBR element

When three-phase circuit breaker is in the unsymmetrical state, PD PSBR will operate if any of the
following conditions is met.

48 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

1) The faulty phase selected by fault phase selection element is not the phase tripped.

2) The difference of current deviation of power frequency component between two healthy
phases increases to certain value all of a sudden.

3.7.7 Scheme Logic

Figure 3.7-8 Logic diagram of PSBR for zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element

The logic setting [En_PSBR] is common for zone 1, 2 of distance element. If the logic setting
[En_PSBR] is set as 0, zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element is not blocked by PSBR and
PSBR for zone 1 and zone 2 of distance element will operate right now (i.e. output state of
[PSBR_Z1/2] is 1).

If the logic setting [En_PSBR] is set as 1, zone 1, 2 of distance element is controlled by PSBR.
After zone 2 of distance element operates and PSBR condition is also met, PSBR for zone 1 and
zone 2 of distance element will operate (i.e., output state of [PSBR_Z1/2] is 1).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 49


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.7-9 Logic diagram of distance protection

50 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection

3.8.1 Overview
If the breaker fails to be tripped, breaker failure protection will operate to re-trip the breaker after a
specified time delay setting [t_BFP1], and trip all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same
busbar and line remote end circuit breaker after a specified time delay setting [t_BFP2]. In general,
the time delay setting [t_BFP1] is less than [t_BFP2].

3.8.2 Function Description

Breaker failure protection consists of two stages. They have independent current setting and time
delay respectively. After short time delay [t_BFP1], local circuit breaker will be tripped. After longer
time delay [t_BFP2], all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and line remote
end circuit breaker will be tripped.

Breaker failure protection with phase-segregated current element as auxiliary blocking condition
can be initiated by phase-segregated tripping contacts from line protection and three-phase
tripping contact from other protection device. To increase the reliability of BFP initiated by
phase-segregated tripping contacts from line protection, as phase overcurrent element is possibly
less than load current, zero-sequence overcurrent element can be enabled by the logic setting
[En_ROC_1P_BFP].

In order to increase the sensitivity of breaker failure protection for the fault occurring in the
transformer or shunt reactor and so on, zero-sequence overcurrent and negative-sequence
overcurrent elements can be selected by logic settings separately. When this protective function
operates, the protection device will issue three-phase tripping command to local circuit breaker
after the time delay of stage 1 [t_BFP1] is expired, and then issue tripping command to all adjacent
circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and the circuit breaker in the remote end of
transmission line after the time delay of stage 2 [t_BFP2] is expired.

3.8.3 Logic Scheme


The following figure shows the logic scheme of breaker failure protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 51


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.8-1 Scheme logic of breaker failure protection

3.9 Switch onto Fault Protection

When the circuit breaker is closed manually or automatically, it is possible to switch on to an

52 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

existing fault. This is especially critical if the line in the remote station is grounded, since the
distance protection and directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection would not clear the fault
until their time delays had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is
desired.

The SOTF (switch onto fault) protection is a complementary function to the distance protection and
to the directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection. With the SOTF protection, a fast trip is
achieved for a fault on the whole line, when the line is being energized. It shall be responsive to all
types of faults anywhere within the protected line.

The SOTF protection shall be controlled by an reclosing logic using both voltage and current level
detectors. It shall be enabled for a period when the circuit is energized either manually or via a
auto-reclosing system.

3.9.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection


3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]

Status of 3-pole AR
1
& 100ms 0
Status of manually closing

& 1 Op_ROC_SOTF
3I0Cal > [I_ROC_SOTF]
& 60ms 0
Status of 1-pole AR

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of zero-sequence SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
60ms when 1-pole auto-reclosing.

Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
100ms if 3I0Cal is greater than setting [I_ROC_SOTF] when 3-pole auto-reclosing or manually
closing.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 53


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.9.2 Distance SOTF Protection

Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Zone 3 of distance element for SOTF will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker when
manually closing.

Zone 2 and 3 of distance element for SOTF without PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase
circuit breaker if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] and [En_Z3SOTF_AR3P] are set as 1
when 3-pole auto-reclosing.

Zone 2 of distance element for SOTF with PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase circuit
breaker when 1-pole or 3-pole auto-reclosing if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] is set as 0.

3.10 Fault Phase Selection (FPS)

Fault phase selection logic can be implemented by the following methods:

1. Detecting the deviation of operation voltage

2. Detecting the differential current

3. Detecting the phase difference between I0 and I2A

The logic makes the relay ideal for single-phase tripping applications.

3.10.1 FPS Based on Deviation of Operation Voltage


UOPA, UOPB and UOPC: deviation of phase operation voltages.

54 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

UOPAB, UOPBC and UOPCA: deviation of phase-to-phase operation voltages.

UOMAX=MAX(UOPA, UOPB, UOPC).

UOMAX=MAX(UOPAB, UOPBC, UOPCA).

If UOMAX is several times higher than the other two deviation of phase operation voltages, the
single-phase fault is ensured, otherwise, the multiplex-phase fault is ensured.

Table 3.10-1 The relation between UOMAX and fault phase

UOMAX or UOMAX Fault phase

UOPA Phase A
UOPB Phase B
UOPC Phase C
UOPAB Phase AB
UOPBC Phase BC
UOPCA Phase CA

3.10.2 FPS Based on Differential Current


The current differential protection of PCS-931 is phase segregated differential protection, so the
operating phase is the fault phase when DPFC current differential element and phase current
differential element operate.

3.10.3 FPS Based on Phase Difference between I0 and I2A


The phase selection algorithm uses the angle relation between I0 and I2A of the relay currents. As
shown in Figure 3.10-1, three regions of fault phase selection are ensured.

Figure 3.10-1 The region of fault phase selection

Depended on the phase relation between I0 and I2A,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 55


Chapter 3 Protection Description

When -60<Arg(I0/I2A)<60, region A is selected, 60<Arg(I0/I2A)<180, region B is selected,


180<Arg(I0/I2A)<300, region C is selected.

Table 3.10-2 The relation between Arg(I0/I2A)and fault phase

Arg(I0/I2A) Region Fault phase


-60~60 A A phase or BC phase
60~180 B B phase or CA phase
180~300 C C phase or AB phase

1. For single-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of faulty phase are in-phase and its distance element
operates.

2. For two-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of non-faulty phase are in-phase but its distance element
does not operate.

3.11 Pole Disagreement

Circuit breaker pole position disagreement can occur on the operation of a breaker with
independent operating gears for the three poles. A pole disagreement can be tolerated for a
limited time.

Pole disagreement procedure comprises of the protection of pole disagreement state and switch
onto fault protection. When the following conditions are met, pole disagreement state is ensured
delay 50ms.

1. Trip confirmation

Trip confirmation means that tripping signal is issued and any phase current is smaller than 0.06IN

2. [BI_52b_Pha]=1, [BI_52b_Phb]=1, [BI_52b_Phc]=1 and line current is smaller than 0.06IN

3.11.1 PD State by Single-phase Trip


When there is single-phase tripping confirmation or any phase [BI_52b_Phx]=1 (x can be a, b or c)
and corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state is confirmed by
protective device. After that, the following things will be done.

1. Single phase tripping confirmation or any phase [BI_52b_Phx]=1 (x can be a, b or c) and


corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN

2. Measuring impedance deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase and


non-fault phase-to-phase

3. Calculating positive voltage of non-fault phase as polarized voltage of distance protection

4. Measuring current deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase as condition to


release power swing blocking under pole disagreement

5. When tripped phase current is greater than 0.06IN or corresponding phase [BI_52b_Phx]=0 (x
can be a, b or c), SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

56 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.11.2 PD State by Three-phase Trip


When there is three-phase tripping confirmation or [BI_52b_Pha]=1, [BI_52b_Phb]=1,
[BI_52b_Phc]=1 and threes currents, IA, IB and IC, are smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state
is confirmed by protective device. After that, the following thing will be done.

1. When threes currents, IA, IB and IC, are greater than 0.06IN or [BI_52b_Pha]=0,
[BI_52b_Phb]=0, [BI_52b_Phc]=0, SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

When pole disagreement state is ensured, corresponding tripped phase-to-ground and


phase-to-phase DPFC distance protection will be disabled. Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection are disabled and inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is not
controlled by directional element.

When the primary system is in the single-phasing, three-phase trip signal will be sent with a time
delay of 200ms if the following conditions are met.

1. Any two phase of [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized

2. The corresponding phases current are smaller than 0.06IN

3. The zero-sequence current is smaller than 0.15IN

3.12 Trip Scheme

1. Tripping logic 1

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 57


Chapter 3 Protection Description

58 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

2. Tripping logic 2

IP>0.06In

SOTF for reclosing manually


& Trip phase A, B and C
1
SOTF for auto-reclosing

1-pole tripping and not dropping off


1 1
Op_Perisist1P
1
Op_ROC2
&
[En_ROC2_Blk_AR] 1

Op_ROC3
&
[En_ROC3_Blk_AR]

Op_ROC4

Op_BFP1
1
Op_BFP2
1
Op_InvROC

Op_OC_VTS 1

Op_3P_RecvTT

Op_Z2 (Phase-to-phase)
&
[En_ZPP2_Blk_AR] 1

Op_Z2 (Phase-to-ground)
&
[En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]

Op_Z3

Op_Z_Rev

Op_OC1
&
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] 1

Op_OC2
&
[En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]

Op_OC3

EBI_Lockout
1
PD and protection element operating

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 59


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3. Blocking AR logic

60 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

SOTF for reclosing manually


1
SOTF for auto-reclosing

1-pole tripping and not dropping off 1


1
Op_Perisist1P

Op_OC1
&
[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] 1

Op_OC2
&
[En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]

Op_OC3

[En_ZPP2_Blk_AR]
&
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-phase)

[En_ZPG2_Blk_AR] 1
&
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-ground)
1
Op_Z3

Op_Z_Rev

[En_ROC2_Blk_AR]
&
Op_ROC2 1

[En_ROC3_Blk_AR]
&
Op_ROC3

Op_ROC4

Op_InvROC

Op_3P_RecvTT 1

Op_OC_VTS

Op_BFP1 1
1
Op_BFP2

PD and protection element operating


& 1 Initiating blocking relay for AR
[En_PDP_Blk_AR]

[En_PhSF_Blk_AR]
&
Op_PhSelFail

[EBI_Lockout] 1 Blocking AR

VT circuit failure

Tripping Logic of PCS-931:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 61


Chapter 3 Protection Description

1. Minimal operating time of the contact is 40ms.

2. DPFC distance protection, zone 1 of distance protection and current differential protection
operate to implement selective tripping by phase selection element.

3. Zone 2 of distance protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker and block AR when
logic setting [En_ZPP2_Blk_AR] or [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR] is set as 1 for phase-to-phase fault
or phase-to-ground fault respectively.

4. Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase


circuit breaker and block AR when logic setting [En_ROC2_Blk_AR] is set as 1

5. Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase


circuit breaker and block AR when logic setting [En_ROC3_Blk_AR] is set as 1

6. Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker
and block AR when logic setting [En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR]

7. Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates to trip three-phase circuit breaker
and block AR when logic setting [En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR]

8. If phase selection element fails and operation element cannot drop off, three-pole tripping
command caused by phase selection failure will be sent after 200ms delay.

9. If any of the following conditions is matched, three-phase tripping signal will be sent directly.

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

Zone 3 of distance protection operating

Reversal distance protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

Switching onto a faulty phase

A fault occurs under pole disagreement condition.

Overcurrent element operating during VT circuit failure

Phase selection failure after 200ms delay

Single phase tripping failure after 150ms delay

Single phase operation condition after 200ms delay

10. Three-phase tripping will be used if two or three phases are selected by the phase selection
element.

11. Any fault occurs under following conditions, three-pole trip element will operate

62 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

The logic setting [En_3PTrip] is set as 1

The binary input [EBI_Lockout] is energized

Auto-reclosing is not ready for operating

3-pole auto-reclosing is adopted

12. When a serious fault occurs, auto-reclosing will be blocked under following conditions:

Manual reclosing or auto-reclosing onto a fault phase

1-pole tripping and not dropping off

3-pole tripping during single phase operation

Tripping for VT circuit failure

Tripping for three-phase fault

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating

Zone 3 of distance protection operating

Reversal distance protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

13. Three-pole trip with auto-reclosing blocked can be selected by logic setting
[En_PhSF_Blk_AR], [En_PDF_Blk_AR] and [En_MPF_Blk_AR].

3.13 Synchronism Check

3.13.1 Overview
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between
systems at both sides, larger impact will be led to the system during reclosing. In addition, the
automatic reclosure is applied with the synchronism check to avoid this situation and improve the
system stability. The synchronism check logic can control the reclosing by checking if the voltage
of the bus and the line at both sides of the circuit breaker is synchronous or the no-voltage
condition is met. The synchronism check logic includes checking the voltage difference, phase
difference and frequency difference of the voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker.

3.13.2 Function Description


The synchronism check is used to check conditions at both sides of the circuit breaker and
compare them with the settings [phi_Diff_SynChk], [f_Diff_SynChk] and [V_Diff_SynChk]. If all
synchronism check conditions are met, the synchronism check conditions can be outputted.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 63


Chapter 3 Protection Description

The no-voltage check is used to measure the amplitude of line voltage or busbar voltage at both
sides of the circuit breaker; after that, compare it with the voltage setting [V_Live] and the
no-voltage setting [V_Dead]; when the measured result is consistent with the setting, the
no-voltage check conditions can be outputted.

3.13.3 Logic Scheme


The logic diagram gives the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
no-voltage check.

3.13.3.1 Synchronism Check

When the frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages of both sides
of the circuit breaker is calculated in the protective device, they can be used as input conditions of
the synchronism check. If the compared voltages at both sides of the circuit breaker are different,
such as, the bus voltage is phase-to-phase voltage and the line voltage is the phase voltage, it is
required to carry out the calculation after the bus voltage has been compensated as the phase
voltage.

The logic setting [En_SynChk_AR] is used to determine whether the synchronism check function
is enabled. When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltage meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, it is regarded
that the synchronism check conditions are met.

Figure 3.13-1 Synchronism check of automatic reclosure

Where:

[En_SynChk_AR]: Logic setting for enabling synchronism check

UDiffVoltage difference between busbar voltage and line voltage

FreqDiffFrequency difference between busbar voltage and line voltage

PhaseDiffPhase difference between busbar voltage and line voltage

ULineHigh: Live Line

UBusHigh: Live Bus

3.13.3.2 Voltage Check

The no-voltage check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,

64 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by logic settings [En_LvB_DdL_AR], [En_DdB_LvL_AR] and
[En_DdB_DdL_AR] respectively. The protection can calculate the measured bus voltage and line
voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the voltage setting [V_Live] and
no-voltage setting [V_Dead], when the voltage is higher than the voltage setting [V_Live], the
voltage conditions are established; when the voltage is lower than the no-voltage setting [V_Dead],
the no-voltage conditions are established.

[En_DdB_DdL_AR]
&

[En_LvB_DdL_AR]
& 1 [t_VoltChk] VolChk OK

[En_DdB_LvL_AR]
&
ULineLow

ULineHigh

UBusHigh

UBusLow

VT circuit abnormal

Figure 3.13-2 Voltage check scheme of automatic reclosure

Where:

[En_LvB_DdL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-line and live-bus check

[En_DdB_LvL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-bus and live-line check

[En_DdB_DdL_AR]: Logic setting for enabling dead-line and dead-bus check

ULineLow: Dead Line

UBusLow: Dead Bus

Alm_CTS: VT circuit is abnormal

The voltage check function shall be blocked if the VT circuit is abnormal.

3.14 Automatic Reclosure

3.14.1 Overview
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, protective relays are
installed on the transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances.
Faults caused by lightning, wind, or tree branches could be temporary in nature and may

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 65


Chapter 3 Protection Description

disappear once the circuit is de-energized. Automatic reclosing systems are put into place to
re-energize and restore the faulted section of the transmission system once the fault is
extinguished (providing it is a temporary fault). For certain transmission systems, reclosing is used
to improve system stability by restoring critical transmission paths as soon as possible.

3.14.2 Function Description


The automatic reclosure can be enabled or disabled by means of the logic setting [En_AR] or the
binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and [EBI_Opt1_AR] via switch on the panel. The protective device
provides one shot automatic reclosure, including the 1-pole, 3-pole and 1/3-pole auto-reclosing.
The reclosing mode is determined by internal logic setting or external binary inputs.

When the 3-pole or 1/3-pole auto-reclosing mode is selected, the following three types of check
modes can be selected: no-voltage check, synchronism check and no check.

3.14.2.1 AR Ready

Before the reclaim time begins, the following conditions must be met:

1. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal

2. The circuit breaker is on closed state before fault occurrence

3. There is no block signal of automatic reclosure

Under normal conditions, if there is the signal input of low pressure, the automatic reclosure will
discharge with the time delay of 200ms. If there is the signal input of low pressure after the circuit
breaker tripping, the automatic reclosure will not discharge.

CB Closed [t_CBClsd_AR]

[BI_LowPres_AR]
Get Ready Logic

AR Inprogress
AR Ready
Any trip

AR ON
&
AR Block element

Figure 3.14-1 Get ready scheme of AR

AR Ready shows that the circuit breaker is able to execute one-shot auto-reclosing.

AR Lock element is the block element of automatic reclosure. If one of following conditions is met,
the automatic reclosure will be blocked.

Block input signal

Manual tripping

The tripping coil or closing coil of the circuit breaker is unhealthy

SOTF protection operating

66 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

The single-phase reclosing when permanent earthing fault

Phase-to-phase zone 2 of distance protection operates and logic setting [En_ZPP2_Blk_AR]


is set as 1

Phase-to-ground zone 2 of distance protection operates and logic setting [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]


is set as 1

Zone 3 of distance element operates

Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates and logic setting


[En_ROC2_Blk_AR] is set as 1

Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates and logic setting


[En_ROC3_Blk_AR] is set as 1

Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates and logic setting


[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] is set as 1

Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates and logic setting


[En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR] is set as 1

Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operates

Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operates

Reversal distance element operating

Breaker failure protection operating

Accelerated inter-tripping element operating

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

fault phase selection fails and logic setting [En_PhSF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

pole disagreement with fault and logic setting [En_PDP_Blk_AR] is set as 1

multi-phase fault happens, and logic setting [En_MPF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

three-phase fault happens when logic setting [En_3PF_Blk_AR] is set as 1

The check conditions are not met yet till the incomplete sequence time expires

3.14.2.2 Initiation

When the system is applied with the 1-pole reclosing or the 1/3-pole reclosing, the 1-pole reclosing
will be active during the single phase fault. When only the single phase is tripped, that is, when the
device receives the single phase tripping contact and the contact drops off to initiate 1-pole
reclosing condition, the 1-pole reclosing will be initiated. If the three-phase are tripped or the
three-phase 52b are energized, the 1-pole reclosing shall not be initiated.

Generally, the auto-reclosing is initiated by the tripping signal from line protection, and this
initiating signal can be the interior tripping logic or the exterior tripping command. When there is
the tripping command, it can be kept in the device, and the automatic reclosure will be initiated

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 67


Chapter 3 Protection Description

after the tripping command drops off.

Reset Logic
&
Single-phase Trip
& 1-pole AR Initiation
1

Any trip

3-pole AR Initiate

1-pole AR

CB Ready

Reset Logic
&
Three-phase Trip
& 3-pole AR Initiation
1

Any trip

3-pole AR

CB Ready

Figure 3.14-2 1-pole and 3-pole scheme logic of auto-reclosing

3.14.2.3 Reclosing

When the time of the reclosing expires, as far as the 3-pole reclosing, if the synchronism check is
enabled, the reclosing signal shall be determined whether is issued or not based on the result of
synchronism check. When the synchronism check function is disabled, the synchronism check will
be established always. With regard to the 1-pole reclosing, the result of synchronism check will not
be judged, and the reclosing signal will be directly outputted after delay time is used up.

The reclosing pulse width of the automatic reclosure can be set through the setting [t_PW_AR].
With regard to the circuit breaker without the anti-pump circuit, the adjustment function of the
reclosing pulse width can be enabled. Namely, when the tripping occurs during the reclosing, the
reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent reclosing into the fault over and over
when the minimum reclosing pulse width is not lower than 50ms.

After the reclosing command is sent and the automatic reclosure can reset after the time delay
[t_Reclaim_AR], the another reclosing can be conducted.

68 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.14-3 Reclosing scheme

With regard to the temporary fault, after the reclosing command is sent and the automatic
reclosure can reset after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR], the another reclosing can be conducted.

With regard to the permanent fault, after the reclosing pulse has been sent, if the protection
tripping signal has been received, or after the reclosing pulse has been sent and with the time
delay [t_Unsuc_AR], the circuit breaker is not closed, which will be regarded as the reclosing into
the permanent fault. The device will send failure signal of reclosing (AR Unsuccessful), which will
last 200ms only.

1
AR Pulse
& [t_Unsuc_AR]
CB closed 1 0 200ms AR Unsuccess

AR Ready
&
Any trip

Figure 3.14-4 Reclosing unsuccessful

3.15 Transfer Trip And Transfer Signal

PCS-931 can exchange not only current but also binary inputs via communication channel
between two ends of line.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 69


Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.15.1 Transfer Trip


Transfer trip is the sending of a trip signal via a communication channel to the remote end of
transmission line. It is very reliable due to using of dedicated byte compensation check and bit
compensation check during transferring binary input. For the local end, when binary input
[BI_Send_TT] is energized, a trip signal will be sent to the remote end. For the remote end, when
such a trip signal received, the state of binary input [BI_RecvTT] will change from 0 to 1. The
trip signal will result in tripping directly when logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] set as 0, or with the
guard of general fault detector element when logic setting [En_FD_Ctrl_TT] set as 1, at the same
time auto-reclosing will be locked out.

RX
TX

+DC
TJA-1

Transfer trip
BI BO
Optical fibre TJB-1
Transfer trip
TJC-1
RX

TX

PCS-931 PCS-931

M N

Figure 3.15-1 The sketch diagram of transfer trip

3.15.2 Transfer signal


Besides the tripping signal, other signals can also be sent to remote end via communication
channel between. For the local end, when binary input [BI_Send1_TS] or [BI_Send2_TS] is
energized, a binary signal will be sent to the remote end. For the remote end, when such a binary
signal is received, the status of binary input [VBI_RecvTS1] or [VBI_RecvTS2] will change from 0
to 1, and corresponding binary output contacts of BO module will close.
Transfer signal 1

YC1-1
RX
TX

+DC BO

YC1-2
Optical fibre
Transfer signal 1
BI
RX

TX
Transfer signal 2

Transfer signal 2
YC2-1

BO

YC2-2

PCS-931 PCS-931
M N

Figure 3.15-2 The sketch diagram of transfer signal

70 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.1 General Description

Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. When
equipment is in energizing process before the LED HEALTHY is on, the equipment need to be
checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the
health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.

In case a fault is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the equipment,
the equipment will be blocked out, which means relay is out of service. Therefore you must
re-energize the relays to make relay back into service.

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. At the same time event recording will record the failure alarm
which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Understand the Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation condition of the equipment are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.

A common abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other
functions can still work. However, if serious hardware failure or abnormality were detected, all
protection functions will be blocked and the LED HEALTHY will be extinguished and blocking
signal will be given by contacts output BSJ. The protective device then cannot work normally and
maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.

Note!

If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnose record. If the reason cannot be found at site,
please notice the factory NARI-RELAYS. Please Do not simply press button TARGET
RESET on the protection panel or re-power on the protective device.

Table 4.2-1 List of alarms information

LED
No. Item Block Relay
HEALTHY ALARM VT ALARM

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 71


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

LED
No. Item Block Relay
HEALTHY ALARM VT ALARM
1 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON YES
2 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU YES
3 Alm_TrpOut YES
4 Alm_Setting YES
5 Alm_VTS
6 Alm_PersistI0
7 Alm_PersistFD
8 Alm_VTS_Ux
9 Alm_CTS
10 Alm_52b
11 Alm_Pwr_Opto
12 Alm_ExTrp_BI
13 Alm_DSP_CPU YES
14 Alm_DSP_MON YES
15 Alm_ID_ChA
16 Alm_ChA
17 Alm_NoValidFram_ChA
18 Alm_CRC_ChA
19 Alm_OutDiffP_ChA
20 Alm_Diff_ChA
21 Alm_CompParam_ChA
22 Alm_TT
23 Alm_Connect_ChA
24 Alm_EquipConfig
25 Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope
26 Alm_BoardConfig YES
27 Alm_SynChkFail_AR
28 GAlm_NetStorm_NetA
29 GAlm_NetStorm_NetB
30 GAlm_Disc_NetA
31 GAlm_Disc_NetB
32 GAlm_CfgUnmatch
33 GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx
34 GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx
35 GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx

: means the corresponding LED indicator is on

Xx: from 00 to 11

Table 4.2-2 Repairmen suggestion for alarms information

No. Item Handing suggestion

72 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

No. Item Handing suggestion


1 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
2 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
3 Alm_TrpOut Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
4 Alm_Setting Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
5 Alm_VTS Check secondary voltage circuit
6 Alm_PersistI0 Check secondary current circuit
7 Alm_PersistFD Check secondary current circuit
8 Alm_VTS_Ux Check secondary voltage circuit
9 Alm_CTS Check secondary current circuit
Check binary input [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and
10 Alm_52b
[BI_52b_Phc]
11 Alm_Pwr_Opto Check DC power supply in the BI module
Check binary input [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other],
12 Alm_ExTrp_BI [BI_TrpC_Other], [BI_Trp3P_Line] and
[BI_Trp3P_G/T]
13 Alm_DSP_CPU Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
14 Alm_DSP_MON Inform manufacture or agency to maintain it
Check the setting [ID_Local] and [ID_Remote] of
15 Alm_ID_ChA
protective device in the both ends
16 Alm_ChA Check communication channel
17 Alm_NoValidFram_ChA Check communication channel
18 Alm_CRC_ChA Check communication channel
19 Alm_OutDiffP_ChA Check communication channel
Check whether the route of communication channel is
20 Alm_Diff_ChA
the same in both directions, and check CT circuit
Check the setting [XC1] and [XC0] and differential
21 Alm_CompParam_ChA
current of protection device
Check binary input [BI_Send_TT] of protection device
22 Alm_TT
in the both ends
23 Alm_Connect_ChA Check the connection of optical fibre channel
Please check the GOOSE configuration file (i.e.
24 Alm_EquipConfig GOOSE.txt) or inform manufacture or agency to
maintain it
25 Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope Check the setting whether its value is out of scope
Check the plug-in module or inform manufacture or
26 Alm_BoardConfig
agency to maintain it
27 Alm_SynChkFail_AR Prompting message
28 GAlm_NetStorm_NetA
Please check the related switches
29 GAlm_NetStorm_NetB
30 GAlm_Disc_NetA
Please check the network.
31 GAlm_Disc_NetB
32 GAlm_CfgUnmatch Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 73


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

No. Item Handing suggestion


network.
33 GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx
Please check the network. (xx: from 00 to 11)
34 GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx
Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the
35 GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx
network. (xx: from 00 to 11)

The following binary signals are only thought as a kind of report stored in the self-supervision
report. They do not need to handle and are only used for commissioning and test.

No. Item Description


1 BO_BlkAR Blocking auto-reclosing
2 BO_Fail_AR Auto-reclosing is failure
3 BO_Inprog_AR Initiating auto-reclosing
4 BO_Lockout Blocking auto-reclosing

4.3 Relay Self-supervision

4.3.1 Fault Detection Check


When the zero sequence general fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an
alarm [Alm_PersistI0] will be issued without the protective device blocked.

When any general fault detector picks up for longer than 10s, an alarm will be issued
[Alm_PersistFD] without the protective device blocked.

4.3.2 Trip Output Circuit Check


Chips controlling the output relays in the output circuit are continually monitored. If any error or
damage is detected in these chips, alarm [Alm_TrpOut] will be given and the protective device will
be blocked.

4.3.3 Settings Check


PCS-931 series has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of
active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If the settings are checked to be
out-of-scope, an alarm will be issued to. The protective device is blocked. At the same time, if
there is any summation error of all setting groups, an alarm [Alm_Settings] will be issued, the
protective device is also blocked.

4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage and Current Drift Auto Regulation


Zero point of voltage and current may drift influenced by variation of temperature or other
environment factors. The equipment continually automatically traces the drift and adjusts it to
normal value.

74 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.4.2 DSP Sampling Monitoring


AC sampling of DSP chip in DSP module (slot 2) is monitored and if the samples are detected to
be wrong, an alarm [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU] will be issued and the protective device will be
blocked.

The relay compares the AC sampling of DSP chip between DSP module (slot 2) and DSP module
(slot 3). In normal condition, the sampling should be the same for a certain AC input. If the
sampling value in DSP module (slot 3) is detected to be different largely with that in DSP module
(slot 2), an alarm [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON] will be issued and the protective device will be
blocked.

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision


Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Alm_Pwr_Opto] will be issued.

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision


If all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized ,which
indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no current detected in the line, the line will be
considered to be out of service. SOTF protection will be enabled for 400ms.

If all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are energized that
indicates circuit breaker is open but there is still current detected in the line or three-phase circuit
breaker is in pole disagreement, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be issued after 10 seconds.

4.5.3 Bus VT Circuit Supervision


The purpose of the voltage transformer circuit failure supervision function is to indicate failure in
the measuring voltage from a voltage transformer. When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly.
PCS-931 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTS) as a count measure against such
incorrect operation.

In normal operation program of the PCS-931, the phasor summation of bus three phase voltage is
checked frequently, if this phasor summation detected is higher than 8.8V and fault detection
element does not operate, VTS will, after 1.25s, output an alarm [Alm_VTS].

If the phasor summation detected is lower than 8.8V but the bus positive voltage U1 is less than
36.7V, VTS will also issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when logic setting [En_LineVT] is set as
0, otherwise, VTS will also issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when circuit breaker is closed
(all of the binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc] are de-energized) or there
is current existing on line.

When VT circuit failure is detected, the protection device will implement the following tasks
automatically.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 75


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

1. disable distance protection

2. enable phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection for VT circuit
failure

3. disable stage 1, 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

4. disable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection when the logic setting
[En_Dir_ROC3] is set as 1

5. disable direction controlled element of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

6. disable direction controlled element of stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent


protection

7. disable direction controlled element of directional phase overcurrent protection

8. disable auto-reclosing

9. to increase the threshold of DPFC distance element to 1.5UN

The alarm [Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically with a time delay of 10s after all three phases
voltage resume to normal condition.

4.5.4 Line VT Circuit Supervision


If the line voltage is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or dead line check, the line voltage is
monitored.

If the line circuit breaker is in close state which is indicated by binary inputs [BI_52b_Pha],
[BI_52b_Phb] and [BI_52b_Phc], but the line voltage is lower than the setting [V_Dead], it means
that line VT circuit fails and an alarm [Alm_VTS_Ux] will be issued after 10s.

If auto-reclosing is disabled, or auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check and voltage


check are not enabled, line voltage is not needed to be connected and line VT circuit supervision
will be disabled.

When line VT circuit failure is detected, the function of synchronism check and dead line check of
auto-reclosing will be disabled automatically.

After line voltage resumes to normal condition, the alarm and its subsequences will be reset
automatically after 10s.

4.5.5 CT Circuit Supervision


The main purpose of the current transformer (CT) circuit failure supervision function is to detect
faults in the secondary circuits of CT and avoid influence on the operation of corresponding
protection functions. This function will be processed all the time, whether general fault detection
picks up or not.

The equipment measures zero sequence current from two sources, which is either calculated
depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC) or derived at the neutral current circuit
from three-phase currents (3I0).

76 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

If 3I0 is less than 0.75 times 3I0Cal or 3I0Cal is less than 0.75 times 3I0, after 200 ms, an alarm
[Alm_CTS] will be issued.

If 3I0Cal exists (3I0>0.1In) but 3U0Cal derived is nearly zero (3U0Cal<3V) and there is a phase whose
current is zero at least, after 10s, an alarm [Alm_CTS] will be issued.

When CT circuit failure is detected, the protection device will implement the following tasks
automatically.

1. disable zero-sequence overcurrent element

2. disable stage 1, 2, 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

3. disable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

4. disable direction controlled element of stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent


protection

3U0Cal: zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the summation of UA, UB and UC. (i.e.,
3U0Cal=UA+UB+UC)

4.5.6 Binary Input Supervision


If any of the binary inputs [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other], [BI_TrpC_Other], [BI_Trp3P_Line]
and [BI_Trp3P_G/T] is energized for longer than 10s, the alarm [Alm_ExTrp_BI] will be issued.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 77


Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

78 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.1 Metering

PCS-931 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The relay samples
24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS value in each interval and updated the LCD display in
every 0.5 second. The measurement data can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or
on the local via tool software or remote PC. Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through
LCD screen.

1. RMS Values

Measured directly

Magnitude of phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc)

Magnitude of synchronism voltage (Ux)

Magnitude of zero-sequence voltage (3U0)

Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)

Magnitude of zero-sequence current (3I0 directly measured from CT circuit)

Received via optic fibre channel

Phase current from the remote end via optical fibre channel A (Ia_Rmt_ChA, Ib_Rmt_ChA,
Ic_Rmt_ChA)

Calculated by DSP

Differential current compensated by capacitive current of optical fibre channel A


(Ida_comp_ChA, Idb_comp_ChA, Idc_comp_ChA)

Differential current not compensated by capacitive current of optical fibre channel A


(Ida_Uncomp_ChA, Idb_Uncomp_ChA, Idc_Uncomp_ChA)

Frequency of line voltage (f_Line)

Frequency of busbar voltage (f_Bus)

Access path: Press key to enter main menu firstly. Select the item VALUES and press key
ENT to enter submenu CPU_METERING, and then press key ENT. The corresponding
metering values mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

2. Phase angle

Measured directly

Phase angle of phase voltage (Ang(Ua), Ang(Ub), Ang(Uc))

Phase angle of synchronism voltage (Ang(Ux))

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 79


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Phase angle of phase current (Ang(Ia), Ang(Ib), Ang(Ic))

Received via optic fibre channel

Phase angle between local phase current not compensated by capacitive current and remote
phase current not compensated by capacitive current (Ang(Ia-Iar), Ang(Ib-Ibr), Ang(Ic-Icr))

Phase angle between local phase current compensated by capacitive current and remote
phase current compensated by capacitive current (Ang(Ia-Iar)_Comp, Ang(Ib-Ibr)_Comp,
Ang(Ic-Icr)_Comp)

In PHASE_ANGLE, the phase angles displayed by three-phase current and three-phase voltage
are based on Phase A voltage.

No. Symbol Definition


Phase angle difference for phase-A voltage (Ua) relative to phase-A
1 Ang(Ua)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for phase-B voltage (Ub) relative to phase-A
2 Ang(Ub)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for phase-C voltage (Uc) relative to phase-A
3 Ang(Uc)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for synchronism voltage (Ux) relative to
4 Ang(Ux)
phase-A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for phase-A current (Ia) relative to phase-A
5 Ang(Ia)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for phase-B current (Ib) relative to phase-A
6 Ang(Ib)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for phase-C current (Ic) relative to phase-A
7 Ang(Ic)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for the local phase-A current (Ia) relative to
8 Ang(Ia-Iar) the remote phase-A current (Iar) (not compensated by capacitive
current)
Phase angle difference for the local phase-B current (Ib) relative to
9 Ang(Ib-Ibr) the remote phase-B current (Ibr) (not compensated by capacitive
current)
Phase angle difference for the local phase-C current (Ic) relative to
10 Ang(Ic-Icr) the remote phase-C current (Icr) (not compensated by capacitive
current)
Phase angle difference for the local phase-A current (Ia) relative to
11 Ang(Ia-Iar)_Comp the remote phase-A current (Iar) (compensated by capacitive
current)
Phase angle difference for the local phase-B current (Ib) relative to
12 Ang(Ib-Ibr)_Comp the remote phase-B current (Ibr) (compensated by capacitive
current)

80 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Phase angle difference for the local phase-C current (Ic) relative to
13 Ang(Ic-Icr)_Comp the remote phase-C current (Icr) (compensated by capacitive
current)

Access path: Press key to enter main menu firstly. Select the item VALUES and press key
ENT to enter submenu PHASE_ANGLE, and then press key ENT. The corresponding phase
angles mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

5.2 Event & Fault Record

5.2.1 General Description


The PCS-931 series provides the following recording functions:

1. Event recorder

2. Disturbance recorder

3. Present recorder

These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
Navigate the menu to view the report through LCD screen.

5.2.2 Event Recorder


5.2.2.1 General Description

The protective device can store the latest 1024 tripping report, the latest 1024 binary input change
report, the latest 1024 self-supervision report and the latest 1024 control report respectively. All
the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available space is exhausted, the
oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.

5.2.2.2 Tripping Report

When any protection element operating or drop out, such as fault detector, distance protection and
so on, they will be logged in event recorder.

5.2.2.3 Self-supervision Report

The protective device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or
abnormal condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged
in event recorder.

5.2.2.4 Binary Input Change Report

When there is binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from 0 to 1
or from 1 to 0, it will be logged as an event recorder.

5.2.2.5 Control Report

If operator implements some operation, such as reboot protective device, modify setting, and so
on, they will be logged as an event recorder.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 81


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.2.3 Disturbance Recorder


5.2.3.1 Application

Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis
of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.

5.2.3.2 Design

Disturbance recorder is consisted of fault report and fault waveform. Disturbance recorder is
initiated by fault detector element.

Disturbance recorder has two types:

1. Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element

2. Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.

5.2.3.3 Capacity and Information of Fault Report

The protective device can store up to 64 fault reports with waveform in non-volatile memory. If a
new fault occurs when 64 faults report have been stored, the oldest fault report will be overwritten
by the latest one.

For each fault report, the following items are included:

1. Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.

2. Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via GPS if connected.
Initiating date and time is when a protective fault detection operates.

3. Relative operating time

An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the report.

4. Faulty phase

5. Fault location

To get accurate result of fault location, the following settings shall be set correctly:

1) Positive-sequence line reactance [X1L]

2) Positive-sequence line resistance [R1L]

3) Zero-sequence line reactance [X0L]

4) Zero-sequence line resistance [R0L]

82 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5) Line length in km [LineLength]

6. protection elements

For the details of designation of each protective element

5.2.3.4 Fault Waveform Record Capacity and Information

MON module can store 64 fault waveform in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when 64
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.

Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.

Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform pre-fault and 14-cycle waveform after fault
detector pickup, and this 16-cycle waveform is high-frequency recording at a rate of 1200Hz (24
points per cycle). If no protection element operates, after the above 16-cycle waveform recording
is finished, the protection device will switch into low-frequency recording at a rate of 50Hz (only
magnitude). If some protection element operates, 14-cycle waveform after protection operation will
be recorded which are high-frequency recording waveform. When the protection device is not in
high-frequency recording state, it will switch into low-frequency recording state automatically. If the
total 1024 points are recorded, this recording waveform is finished.

The sampling rate of high-frequency recording is 24 points per cycle and that of low-frequency
recording is 1 point per cycle to record RMS magnitude of current or voltage.

5.2.4 Present Recording


Present recording is used to record a piece of waveform of present operation equipment which
can be trigger manually on LCD of equipment or remotely through auxiliary software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.

Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before and 14-cycle waveform after triggering, and
this 16-cycle waveform is high-frequency recording waveform. Then the protection device will
switch into low-frequency recording. Each piece of present recording waveform will occupy the
memory room of a piece of disturbance recording waveform, and triggering present recording will
be logged as a piece of fault report.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 83


Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

84 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.1 General Description

PCS-931 series is made of a 4U height 19 chassis for panel flush mounting. Components
mounted on its front include a 320240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and
a 9 pin connector for communication with PC. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the
equipment for these functions. Shown as Figure 6.1-1 front view of PCS-931.

HEALTHY xx
PCS - 931
ALARM xx
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
VT ALARM xx

AR READY xx

GR
P
CH A ALARM xx
ENT
CH B ALARM xx
ESC

TRIP A xx

TRIP B xx

TRIP C xx

RECLOSE xx

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of PCS-931

The 10 defined LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), VT circuit
supervision (VT ALARM) self-supervision (ALARM), auto-reclosing reclaimed (AR READY),
channel supervision (CH A ALARM, CH B ALARM), protection operates (TRIP A, TRIP B and
TRIP C), auto-reclosing operates (RECLOSE).

As to buttons of the keypad, ENT is enter, GRP is group number and ESC is escape.

NR1403 NR1502 NR1550 NR1551 NR1551 NR1560


NR1102C NR1123E NR1123D NR1301
5V BJ
1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 BJJ BSJ

DANGER 1 COM1
TX
2 BSJ1

3 BJJ1

4 COM2
5 BSJ2

6 BJJ2
RX 7 24V

8 24VGND
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 FGND

Figure 6.1-2 Rear view of PCS-931 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary output)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 85


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1502
NR1102C NR1123G NR1123F NR1126A NR1301
5V BJ
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 BJJ BSJ

TX TX TX

RX
RX RX
TX
1 COM1
TX RX 2 BSJ1

3 BJJ1

4 COM2
5 BSJ2

6 BJJ2
RX 7 24V

8 24VGND
9
ETHERNET1
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 FGND

ETHERNET2

Figure 6.1-3 Rear view of PCS-931 (ECVT and GOOSE binary output)

According to output method and sampling method of the protection device, output method
including conventional binary output and GOOSE binary output, and sampling method including
conventional CT/VT and ECVT (electronic current and voltage transformer), PCS-900 series
provide standard modules and optional module for different protection device.

Table 6.1-1 Hardware configuration

No. ID Name Function Description Remark


1 NR1102 MON Communication interface standard module
2 NR1123 DSP Protection function calculation standard module
3 NR1123 DSP Fault detector logic calculation standard module
4 NR1403 AI Analog current and voltage input optional module
5 NR1126 GOOSE GOOSE signal input and output optional module
6 NR1502 BI Binary input via opto-coupler standard module
7 NR1502 BI Binary input via opto-coupler optional module
8 NR1552 BO Binary output (signal or trip) standard module
9 NR1551 BO Binary output (signal or trip) optional module
10 NR1560 BO Binary output (signal or trip) optional module
11 NR1301 PWR DC power supply standard module

6.2 Typical Wiring

1. Sampling circuit adopting conventional CT/VT

86 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

A
*

52b
B
*

C
*

409 410 411 412 413 414 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408

Ua Ub Uc Un Ux Ux' Ia Ia' Ib Ib' Ic Ic' I0 I0'

Voltage Input Current Input

AI Module

001 COMMON1 ETHERNET 1


PC
002 BSJ-1 ETHERNET 2

003 BJJ-1 RS485A 101

COM1
004 COMMON2 1 1 RS485B 102

005 BSJ-2 2 2 GND 103


PWR Module

006 BJJ-2 3 3 RS485A 104

MON Module

COM2
007 24V OPTO+ 4 4 RS485B 105
To BI
Module LCD
HMI

008 24V OPTO- KEYPAD


5 5 GND 106

009 6 6 RS485A 107

GPS
010 220/110V DC+ 7 7 RS485B 108

DC 011 220/110V DC- 8 8 GND 109


Serial Port
012 GROUND 9 9 RS232R 110

PTINTER
PTR
RS232 DB 9 RS232T 111

GROUND BUS GROUND 112

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-931 (adopting conventional CT/VT)

Typical wiring of PCS-931 which adopts conventional CT/VT is shown in Figure 6.2-1.

2. Sampling circuit adopting ECVT

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 87


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

B ECVTRemote Module

Phase C Phase B Phase A

Merging Unit

RX TX RX TX

Receiving sampling data through multi-mode optical fibre from merging unit

TX RX TX RX

FO transmitting FO Receiving FO transmitting FO Receiving

DSP Module DSP Module

001 COMMON1 ETHERNET 1


PC
002 BSJ-1 ETHERNET 2

003 BJJ-1 RS485A 101

004 COMMON2 1 1 RS485B 102

005 BSJ-2 2 2 GND 103

006 BJJ-2 3 3 RS485A 104

007 24V OPTO+ 4 4 RS485B 105


To BI
Module 008 24V OPTO-
LCD
5 5 GND 106
KEYPAD

009 6 6 RS485A 107

010 220/110V DC+ 7 7 RS485B 108

DC 011 220/110V DC- 8 8 GND 109


Serial Port
012 GROUND 9 9 RS232R 110

RS232 DB 9 RS232T 111

GROUND BUS GROUND 112

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-931 (adopting ECVT)

Typical wiring of PCS-931 which adopts ECVT is shown in Figure 6.2-2.

In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT), the merging
unit will merge the sample data from ECVT, and then send it to the protection device through
multi-mode optical fibre. The double DSP modules (NR1123) of protection device receive the data

88 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

from merging unit respectively through the optical-fibre interface to complete the protection
function calculation and fault detector logic calculation.

The difference between the hardware platform based on ECVT and the hardware platform based
on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sample data only, and the protective device
receives the sampling data of merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.

6.3 Plug-in Modules

The protection device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and
the major characteristics of the new platform include high reliability, great capability in
anti-interference, intellectualization and networking. See Figure 6.3-1 for hardware diagram.

External
Conventional CT/VT A/D Opto-coupler
Binary Input
DSP
ECVT
Output
Relay

Conventional CT/VT A/D


DSP
ECVT QDJ

ETHERNET PRINT
LCD/Power Supply CPU
+E
GPS SERIAL PORT

Figure 6.3-1 Hardware diagram

6.3.1 MON Module


The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete
device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.

The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 89


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1102C NR1102D NR1102H NR1102I

TX TX
ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1 FO 1 FO 1
RX RX
To SAS To SAS To SAS
TX TX
ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2 FO 2 FO 2
RX RX
To SAS
ETHERNET 3 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1
To SAS To SAS
ETHERNET 4 ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2

SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01

SYN- 02 SYN- 02 SYN- 02 SYN- 02


To GPS To GPS To GPS To GPS
SHLD 03 SHLD 03 SHLD 03 SHLD 03

GND 04 GND 04 GND 04 GND 04

RTS 05 RTS 05 RTS 05 RTS 05

TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT


SGND 07 SGND 07 SGND 07 SGND 07

Module ID Memory Interface Physical Layer


NR1102C 128M DDR 2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102D 128M DDR 4 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102H 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre SC
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102I 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre TC
485-1A 01

Twisted pair wire 485-1B 02


COM
SHLD 03

GND 04

SYN+ 01

Twisted pair wire SYN- 02


GPS

SHLD 03

GND 04

RTS 01

Twisted pair wire TXD 02


PRINT

SGND 03

GND 04

Figure 6.3-2 Wiring of communication interface

There are above four types of MON module are optional for PCS-931 and pin definitions are same
except Ethernet ports.

Pin No. Symbol Description


~01 SYN+
EIA RS-485 standardized interface for clock
~02 SYN-
synchronization, PPS and IRIG-B signals are permitted.
~03 SHLD
~04 GND Grounded connection of this protection device

90 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Pin No. Symbol Description


~05 RXD
Interface for connecting with a printer, the EPSON
~06 TXD
LQ-300K printer is recommended.
~07 SGND

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-2. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to
connect the + and terminals of difference signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to
connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices
connected with the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports; the free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device; it is used
to connect the external shields of the two cables when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of cable shall be grounded at one of the ends.

6.3.2 DSP Module (Protection Function Calculation)


The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, sample data exchanging with the opposite side,
calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.

When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.

The module can provide 2,048kbit/s or 64kbit/s single-mode optical-fibre to exchange data and
signal with the opposite-side protection device.

6.3.3 DSP Module (Fault Detector Logic Calculation)


The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of general fault detector elements and
providing positive power supply to output relay.

When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.

The following figure is the type definition for MON module; corresponding module shall be adopted
in accordance with concrete situation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 91


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.3-3 DSP module

Module ID CT/VT Type FO Interface Remark


NR1123D Conventional CT/VT No
NR1123E Conventional CT/VT Yes
NR1123F Single ECVT No
NR1123G Single ECVT Yes
NR1123K Double ECVT No Used to multi-breaker, 3/2 breakers

6.3.4 AI Module
The protection device which supports ECVT should not be equipped with this module. The slot
numbers of the module are 4 and 5. The AI module (NR1401) is applicable for the plant or station
with analog VT and CT.

IA, IB, IC and 3I0 are phase current and zero sequence current input to AI module separately with
rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. It is assumed
that forward direction of CT should be pointed from busbar to line.

3I0 derived is used for calculation of zero-sequence directional element and zero-sequence
overcurrent element, but 3I0 measured is used for zero-sequence current fault detector element.
Therefore, 3I0 measured shall be connected to the equipment, otherwise all relevant zero
sequence current protection will be disabled. Because only the magnitude of 3I0 measured is used,
the directionality of 3I0 measured can be forward direction or reverse direction. Maximum linear
range of the current converter is 30In. Table 6.3-1 lists the pin number and its definition of AI
module.

92 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1403

Ia 01 Ian 02

Ib 03 Ibn 04

Ic 05 Icn 06

3I0 07 3I0n 08

Ua 09 Ub 10

Uc 11 Un 12

Ux 13 Uxn 14

GND 15

Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition of AI module

Terminal No. Definition Definition


401 Ia The current of phase A (Polarity mark)
402 Ian The current of phase A
403 Ib The current of phase B (Polarity mark)
404 Ibn The current of phase B
405 Ic The current of phase C (Polarity mark)
406 Icn The current of phase C
407 I0 Zero-sequence current (Polarity mark)
408 I0n Zero-sequence current
409 Ua The voltage of phase A
410 Ub The voltage of phase B
411 Uc The voltage of phase C
412 Un The voltage of neutral
413 Ux
The synchronism voltage
414 Uxn
415 GND Ground

UA, UB, and UC are phase voltage used to protection function calculation. Ux is the synchronism
voltage and used for synchronism check, it could be any phase-to-ground voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage, and terminal 213 is the polarity mark. If the auto-reclosing is disabled or
enabled but without any check, the voltage Ux should be disconnected.

The no-voltage check conditions will be met when the line voltage is less than the setting [V_Dead],
and the voltage conditions of synchronism check will be met when the line voltage is more than the
setting [V_Live]. If the automatic reclosure is disabled or the no check for automatic reclosure is
enabled, the line voltage could be disconnected. When the automatic reclosure is enabled and the
no-voltage check and synchronism check is applied, check whether the input voltage is higher
than the setting [V_Dead] during the normal operation of device. If it is, the alarm of VT circuit

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 93


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

failure will be issue with a time delay of 10s and the alarm relay is triggered to work.

Terminal 415 is ground point. It shall be connected to ground bus.

6.3.5 GOOSE Module


This module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, two 100M optical-fibre Ethernet,
two 100M RJ-45 Ethernet and other peripherals. The module supports GOOSE function and IEC
61850-9-1, IEC 61850-9-2 Protocol. Its functions include that the protective device receives data
from the merging unit and sending GOOSE command to the intelligent control device etc. This
module is not required when the GOOSE function is not applied.

The sending and receiving functions of GOOSE should be completed through configuring the
sending module and receiving module.

1. GOOSE sending function

The protection device can support to configure up to 8 sending modules, and it is recommended to
configure 1 sending module. To facilitate the site debugging, the maximized configuration, i.e. 12
isolator links used for sending function of GOOSE, are available in the protection device. When
corresponding isolator link is open, the associated GOOSE sending information will be reset. Each
GOOSE sending information includes the GOOSE sending information and the state information
of binary input [BI_BlkComm] of the protection device, so as to judge whether the receiving signal
is used effectively at the receiving side. At present, the GOOSE sending information in the
protection device includes the following signals, trip A, trip B, trip C, blocking AR, reclosing,
transfer signal 1, transfer signal 2 and channel alarm. To meet different requirements, 12 isolator
links and various sending information can be combined with each other flexibly, and the
corresponding short address is shown as in the table below:

Signal Signal 0 Signal 1


Isolator Link Trip A Trip B
EBI_Send_GOOSE00 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE01 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE02 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE03 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE04 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE05 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE06 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE07 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE08 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE09 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE10 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN1
EBI_Send_GOOSE11 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN0 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN1

Signal Signal 2 Signal 3


Isolator Link Trip C Reclosing
EBI_Send_GOOSE00 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN3

94 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

EBI_Send_GOOSE01 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN3


EBI_Send_GOOSE02 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE03 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE04 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE05 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE06 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE07 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE08 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE09 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE10 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN3
EBI_Send_GOOSE11 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN2 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN3

Signal Signal 4 Signal 5


Isolator Link Blocking AR Transfer trip 1
EBI_Send_GOOSE00 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE01 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE02 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE03 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE04 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE05 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE06 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE07 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE08 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE09 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE10 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN5
EBI_Send_GOOSE11 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN4 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN5

Signal Signal 6 Signal 7


Isolator Link Transfer signal 2 Channel alarm
EBI_Send_GOOSE00 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S0_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE01 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE02 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S2_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE03 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S3_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE04 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S4_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE05 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S5_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE06 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S6_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE07 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S7_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE08 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S8_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE09 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S9_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE10 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S10_BIN7
EBI_Send_GOOSE11 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN6 B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S11_BIN7

For example, if the isolator link [EBI_Send_GOOSE01] is defined as the isolator link of tripping
output, the reclosing signal controlled by this isolator shall be configured with the short address

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 95


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

B02.SwitchOut_F0.Go_S1_BIN3 in the GOOSE configuration file.

2. GOOSE receiving function

The protection device supports to configure up to 12 GOOSE receiving modules, and each
receiving module is configured with one virtual enabling binary input setting (VEBI setting) used to
receive. At present, the GOOSE signal supported to receive is shown as follows.

No. GOOSE BI Remark BI via OPTO Valid BI


1 GBI_Lockout1
EBI_Lockout_OPT (810)
2 GBI_Lockout2
The relation is (This binary input is always
3 GBI_Lockout3 EBI_Lockout
OR among them valid no matter whether
4 GBI_Lockout4
GOOSE function is enabled)
5 GBI_Lockout5
6 GBI_52b_PhA BI_52b_PhA_OPT (822) BI_52b_Pha
7 GBI_52b_PhB BI_52b_PhB_OPT (823) BI_52b_Phb
8 GBI_52b_PhC BI_52b_PhC_OPT (824) BI_52b_Phc
9 GBI_Send_TT1
10 GBI_Send_TT2 The relation is
BI_Send_TT_OPT (826) BI_Send_TT
11 GBI_Send_TT3 OR among them
12 GBI_Send_TT4
13 GBI_Send1_TS1
14 GBI_Send1_TS2 The relation is
BI_Send1_TS_OPT (827) BI_Send1_TS
15 GBI_Send1_TS3 OR among them
16 GBI_Send1_TS4
17 GBI_Send2_TS1
18 GBI_Send2_TS2 The relation is
BI_Send2_TS_OPT (828) BI_Send2_TS
19 GBI_Send2_TS3 OR among them
20 GBI_Send2_TS4
21 GBI_TrpA_Other BI_TrpA_Other_OPT (807) BI_TrpA_Other
22 GBI_TrpB_Other BI_TrpB_Other_OPT (811) BI_TrpB_Other
23 GBI_TrpC_Other BI_TrpC_Other_OPT (812) BI_TrpC_Other
24 GBI_3PTrp_Line BI_3PTrp_Line_OPT (807) BI_3PTrp_Line
25 GBI_3PTrp_G/T1
26 GBI_3PTrp_G/T2
The relation is
27 GBI_3PTrp_G/T3 BI_3PTrp_G/T_OPT (817) BI_3PTrp_G/T
OR among them
28 GBI_3PTrp_G/T4
29 GBI_3PTrp_G/T5
30 GBI_LowPres_AR BI_LowPres_AR_OPT (818) BI_LowPres_AR

To facilitate the site debugging, the GOOSE binary inputs in the table above are the receiving
signal of GOOSE itself. It is necessary to combine with GOOSE VEBI setting of GOOSE receiving,
the state of GOOSE receiving link and the state of binary input [BI_BlkComm] to judge whether the
GOOSE binary input is valid. The concrete relationship is shown as follows:

The received GOOSE valid information=([BI_BlkComm]=1 at both sending end and receiving

96 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

end[BI_BlkComm]=0 at both sending end and receiving end) & GOOSE receiving information &
corresponding GOOSE VEBI setting & corresponding communication link is normal.

When the sending GOOSE link is interrupted, GOOSE VEBI setting is set as 0, and the state of
binary input [BI_BlkComm] at the sending end is not consistent with that at the receiving end, the
open position of circuit breaker will maintain its original value.

3. GOOSE communication state

By the command menus GOOSE_COMM_STATE and GOOSE_RPT_STA in the menu


TEST_MODE of the protection device, the GOOSE communication state includes the content as
follows:

No. Item Description


1 N_RecvdFrame Count the number of frames received through GOOSE
2 N_SentFrame Count the number of frames sent through GOOSE.
3 Count the number of DMA (Direct Memory Access) error
N_Err_RecvdDMA
for receiving data through GOOSE.
4 Count the number of DMA errors for transmitting data
N_Err_SentDMA
through GOOSE.
5 Count the number of miscellaneous errors of receiving
N_Err_Recvd_Misc
data through GOOSE.
6 Count the number of miscellaneous errors for transmitting
N_Err_Sent_Misc
data through GOOSE.
7 Counter the number of memory errors of receiving data
N_Err_RecvdMemData
through GOOSE
8 Count the number of network storms occurred through
N_NetStorm_GOOSE
GOOSE.

The GOOSE report statistics includes the content as follows:

No. Item Description


1 N_Fail_SentGOOSE Count the number of being failed to transmit data through
GOOSE.
2 N_Err_DecodeGOOSE Count the number of decoding errors through GOOSE.

4. GOOSE Alarm Information

No. Item Description


GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm
1 GAlm_NetStorm_NetA
occurring on the network A.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm
2 GAlm_NetStorm_NetB
occurring on the network B.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A is
3 GAlm_Disc_NetA
disconnected.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B is
4 GAlm_Disc_NetB
disconnected.
5 GAlm_CfgUnmatch The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 97


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.

Optional types of GOOSE module are listed in the following.

NR1126A NR1126B NR1126C NR1126D

SC Interface SC Interface ST Interface ST Interface


100M FX 100M FX 100M FX 100M FX

SC Interface SC Interface ST Interface ST Interface


100M FX 100M FX 100M FX 100M FX

ST Interface ST Interface
RX1 RX1
IRIGB IRIGB

Module ID Interface Physical Layer Description


NR1126A 2 Ethernet SC multi-mode optical fibre
2 Ethernet SC multi-mode optical fibre
NR1126B Support IEC61850, GOOSE and
IRIGB ST
IEC61850-9-1, IEC61850-9-2,
NR1126C 2 Ethernet ST multi-mode optical fibre
receiving and sending data
2 Ethernet ST multi-mode optical fibre
NR1126D
IRIGB ST

6.3.6 BI Module
Intelligent binary input module (NR 1502) can supervise 25 binary inputs at the same time and
transmit binary inputs to other modules by inner bus. For NR 1502D, the rated work voltage of all
binary inputs are 24V, and for NR 1502A, the rated work voltage of all binary inputs are 220/110V.
When the voltage of binary input is greater than 70% of rated work voltage, the binary input is
energized and when the voltage of binary input is smaller than 60% of rated work voltage, the
binary input is de-energized.

98 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1502D

BI_2 02 BI_1 01

BI_4 04 BI_3 03

BI_6 06 BI_5 05

BI_8 08 BI_7 07

BI_10 10 BI_9 09

BI_12 12 BI_11 11

BI_14 14 13

16 BI_15 15

BI_18 18 BI_17 17

BI_20 20 BI_19 19

BI_22 22 BI_21 21

BI_24 24 BI_23 23

BI_26 26 BI_25 25

BI_28 28 BI_27 27

30 BI_29 29

Pin No. Sign Description Remark


Binary input of time synchronizing
01 BI_Pulse_GPS
pulse
02 BI_Print Binary input of initiating printing
Binary input of blocking
03 BI_BlkComm communication between the
protective device and SAS Regular binary input
04 BI_RstTarg Binary input of signal reset
Binary input of switching active
05 BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp
setting group
Binary input of switching active
06 BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp
setting group
Positive pole of power supply for
14 Opto_H+
opto-coupler (220V/110V)
Power supply
Negative pole of power supply for
15 Optp_H-
opto-coupler (220V/110V)
Binary input of enabling/disabling
EBI_DiffP
differential protection
Binary input of enabling/disabling
EBI_DistP
differential protection
Configurable binary
Binary input of enabling/disabling
07~11, input (if these binary
EBI_ROC directional zero-sequence
12, inputs are not
overcurrent protection
17~29 configured, their
Binary input of enabling/disabling
default state are 1)
EBI_OC directional phase overcurrent
protection
Binary input of enabling/disabling
EBI_Z1
zone 1 of distance protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 99


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Binary input of other protection


BI_TrpA_Other
operating to trip phase A
Binary input of other protection
BI_TrpB_Other
operating to trip phase B
Binary input of other protection
BI_TrpC_Other
operating to trip phase C
Binary input 1 of mode option of
EBI_Opt1_AR
automatic reclosure
Binary input 2 of mode option of
EBI_Opt2_AR
automatic reclosure
Binary input used to lockout the
EBI_Lockout auto-reclosing function of the
protected line.
Binary input of line protection
BI_3PTrp_Line
operating to trip three phases
Binary input of generator or
BI_3PTrp_G/T transformer protection operating to
Configurable binary
trip three phases
input (if these binary
Binary input used to initiate record
inputs are not
BI_TrigOscillog waveform of present current and
configured, their
voltage.
default state are 0)
Binary input of MCB of single-phase
BI_MCB_VT_Line
voltage used for synchronism check
Binary input of MCB of three-phase
BI_MCB_VT_Bus
voltage used for protection
Binary input of normally closed
BI_52b_Pha
contact of phase A of circuit breaker
Binary input of normally closed
BI_52b_Phb
contact of phase B of circuit breaker
Binary input of normally closed
BI_52b_Phc
contact of phase C of circuit breaker
Binary input of low pressure to
BI_LowPres_AR
block automatic reclosure
BI_Send_TT Binary input of sending transfer trip
Binary input of sending transfer
BI_Send1_TS
signal 1
Binary input of sending transfer
BI_Send2_TS
signal 2
13 Blank
16 Blank
30 Blank

1. Terminal 814

100 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

The positive pole of opto-coupler, which should be connected with the positive pole of DC power
supply (PWR module: terminal 001). It is used to supervise whether DC power supply is normal or
not. The positive pole of PWR module should be connected to common of all binary inputs.

2. Terminal 815

The negative pole of opto-coupler, which should be connected with the negative pole of DC power
supply (PWR module: terminal 102).

3. Terminal 801

Binary input: [BI_Pulse_GPS]

It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from GPS or other equipment used clock
synchronism, the binary input [BI_Pulse_GPS] will change from 0 to 1 once per second or per
minute depended on the setting [GPS_Pulse]. When setting [GPS_Pulse] is set to 1, the
equipment receives PPM (pulse per minute), otherwise, receives PPS (pulse per second). Clock
synchronism via RS-485 bus is recommended. Only one of them can be selected.

4. Terminal 802

Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually to trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_Auto_Print]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_Auto_Print]=1), report will be
printed automatically as soon as it is formed.

5. Terminal 803

Binary input: [BI_BlkComm]

It is used to block monitoring direction communication when the protective device is maintained. A
link located on the panel is used for that. When the equipment is in maintenance or commissioning
status, this link should be closed. All of the reports will not be sent via communication port then,
but local displaying and printing are still working. This link should be open during normal operation
condition.

6. Terminal 804

Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to manually reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing
a button on the panel or by remote command via communication channel.

7. Terminal 805

Binary input: [BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp]

It is used to switch active setting group associating with binary input [Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp].

8. Terminal 806

Binary input: [Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp]

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 101


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

It is used to switch active setting group associating with binary input [Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp].

Table 6.3-2 Switchover of active setting group

Terminal Binary input Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3


805 [Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp] 0 1 0 1
806 [Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp] 0 0 1 1

All binary inputs mentioned below are configurable binary inputs, and they can be pointed to any
terminal except terminal 01~06, 13, 16 and 30 by software RCS-PC. The configuration method
can refer to section 7.3.2.

1. Binary input: [EBI_DiffP]

It is used to enable/disable differential protection.

2. Binary input: [EBI_DistP]

It is used to enable/disable distance protection.

3. Binary input: [EBI_ROC]

It is used to enable/disable directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

4. Binary input: [EBI_OC]

It is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent protection.

5. Binary input: [EBI_Z1]

It is used to enable/disable zone 1 of distance protection.

6. Binary input: [BI_TrpA_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase A, and is usually from phase-A tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.

7. Binary input: [BI_TrpB_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase B, and is usually from phase-B tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.

8. Binary input: [BI_TrpC_Other]

It is used to initiate BFP of phase C, and is usually from phase-C tripping contact of other
protection device. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out
immediately after operation.

9. Binary input: [EBI_Opt1_AR]

It is used to select mode of auto-reclosing through switch associated with binary input
[EBI_Opt2_AR] when logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as 0.

102 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

10. Binary input: [EBI_Opt2_AR]

It is used to select mode of auto-reclosing through switch associated with binary input
[EBI_Opt1_AR] when logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as 0.

The below table shows the relation between the state of binary input and AR mode.

Pin No. Binary input 1-Pole AR 3-Pole AR 1/3-Pole AR Disable


808 EBI_Opt1_AR 0 1 0 1
809 EBI_Opt2_AR 0 0 1 1

When binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and [EBI_Opt2_AR] are both energized, only the
auto-reclosing function of the protective device is disabled but selection of faulty phase is still valid.
The auto-reclosing function is still finished by the other protective device. The auto-reclosing
function of the protected line can be locked out through energizing the binary input [EBI_Lockout].
When logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set to 1, the binary inputs [EBI_Opt1_AR] and
[EBI_Opt2_AR] are disabled.

11. Binary input: [EBI_Lockout]

It is used to lockout the auto-reclosing function of the protected line. Three-phase tripping is
implemented and the auto-reclosing function will be locked out for any type of fault when it is
energized.

12. Binary input: [BI_3PTrp_Line]

It is used to initiate BFP of three phases, and is usually from three-phase tripping contact of line
protection. The tripping contact is instantaneous operation contact, i.e. it will drop out immediately
after operation.

13. Binary input: [BI_3PTrp_G/T]

It is used to initiate BFP of three phases, and is usually from three-phase tripping contact of all
protection device except line protection, such as generator, transformer, and so on, which will not
initiate auto-reclosing.

14. Binary input: [BI_TrigOscillog]

It is used to initiate record waveform of present current and voltage.

15. Binary input: [BI_MCB_VT_Line]

It is used to indicate line VT is out of service. When VT is maintained or protective device is in


service without protection VT, it is energized. This binary input always connects single-phase VT.

16. Binary input: [BI_MCB_VT_Bus]

It is used to indicate busbar VT is out of service. When VT is maintained or protective device is in


service without protection VT, it is energized. This binary input always connects three-phase VT.

17. Binary input: [BI_52b_Pha]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the status

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 103


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.

18. Binary input: [BI_52b_Phb]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the
status of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.

19. Binary input: [BI_52b_Phc]

It is normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of circuit breaker and is used to indicate the
status of circuit. It is provided by interposing relay, for example, CZX-12R.

20. Binary input: [BI_LowPres_AR]

It is connected with auxiliary contact of circuit breaker, which is used to supervise closing pressure
of circuit breaker. The auto-reclosing will be blocked after 200ms when it is energized. If
auto-reclosing of protective device is disabled, it need not be connected.

21. Binary input: [BI_Send_TT]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer tripping signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel.

22. Binary input: [BI_Send1_TS]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel
associated with auxiliary criterion of other protective device, for example, RCS-925 voltage relay.

23. Binary input: [BI_Send2_TS]

It is common connected with tripping contact from other protective device, such as breaker failure
protection. It is used to transfer signal and trip remote circuit breaker through the channel
associated with auxiliary criterion of other protective device, for example, RCS-925 voltage relay.

Pin No. Binary input Pin No. Binary input


801 BI_Pulse_GPS 816
802 BI_Print 817 BI_3PTrp_Line
803 BI_BlkComm 818 BI_3PTrp_G/T
804 BI_RstTarg 819 BI_TrigOscillog
805 Bl_Opt1_ActiveGrp 820 BI_MCB_VT_Line
806 Bl_Opt2_ActiveGrp 821 BI_MCB_VT_Bus
807 BI_TrpA_Other 822 BI_52b_Pha
808 EBI_Opt1_AR 823 BI_52b_Phb
809 EBI_Opt2_AR 824 BI_52b_Phc
810 EBI_Lockout 825 BI_LowPres_AR
811 BI_TrpB_Other 826 BI_Send_TT
812 BI_TrpC_Other 827 BI_Send1_TS
813 828 BI_Send2_TS
814 829 BI_Reserved

104 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

815 830

The above table gives a default configuration of binary inputs.

+ 814 Positive pole of DC (+)


DC Power Supply
- 815 Negative pole of DC (-)

801 BI_Pulse_GPS

802 BI_Print

803 BI_BlkComm

804 BI_RstTarg

805 BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp

806 BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp

807 Binary input x

829 Binary input x

Internal connected

Figure 6.3-4 External connections of BI module

6.3.7 BO Module

NR1521B

01
Configurable BO1
02
03
Configurable BO2
04
05
Configurable BO3
06
07
Configurable BO4
08
09
Configurable BO5
10
11
Configurable BO6
12
13
Configurable BO7
14
15
Configurable BO8
16
17
Configurable BO9
18
19
Configurable BO10
20
21
Configurable BO11
22

The module provides 11 groups of normally open contacts, which are all configurable binary output.
Apart from configurable BO10 and BO11, all contacts provided by this module are controlled by
general pick-up relay.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 105


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Any operation signal, alarm signal, intermediate signal or combination signal (support
programmable logic) can be pointed to any output channel, which can fulfill that some special
requirement that specific signal must be output to trip circuit breaker or issue signal. The
configuration method can refer to section 7.3.3.

6.3.8 BO Module

NR1552A

BSJ-1 02 COM1 01

XTJ-1 04 BJJ-1 03

COM2 06 XHJ-1 05

BJJ-2 08 BSJ-2 07

COM4 10 COM3 09

TDGJ-1 12 TDGJ-2 11

YC1-1 14 YC2-1 13

YC1-2 16 YC2-2 15

YC1-2 18 YC2-2 17

TJ-1 20 COM 19

BCJ-1 22 TJABC-1 21

TJ-2 24 COM 23

BCJ-2 26 TJABC-2 25

TJ-3 28 COM 27

BCJ-3 30 TJABC-3 29

Pin No. Sign Description


01 COM1 Common terminal for local signal
01~02 BO_Fail_1 Binary output 1 of failure signal
01~03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Binary output 1 of alarm signal
01~04 BO_Trp_1 Binary output 1 of tripping signal
01~05 BO_Cls_1 Binary output 1 of closing signal
06 COM2 Common terminal for remote signal
06~07 BO_Fail_2 Binary output 2 of failure signal
06~08 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Binary output 2 of alarm signal
09 COM3 Common terminal 1 for sending signal
09~11 BO_Alm_Ch_2 Binary output 2 of optical fibre channel abnormal
Binary output 1 of transfer signal after receiving binary
09~13 BO_Recv2_TS_1
signal of transfer signal 2
Binary output 2 of transfer signal after receiving binary
15~17 BO_Recv2_TS_2
signal of transfer signal 2
10 COM4 Common terminal 2 for sending signal
10~12 BO_Alm_Ch_1 Binary output 1 of optical fibre channel abnormal
Binary output 1 of transfer signal after receiving binary
10~14 BO_Recv1_TS_1
signal of transfer signal 1
Binary output 2 of transfer signal after receiving binary
16~18 BO_Recv1_TS_2
signal of transfer signal 1

106 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

19 COM Common terminal 1 for tripping contact


19~20 BO_Trp1P_1 Binary output 1 of single-phase tripping
19~21 BO_Trp3P_1 Binary output 1 of three-phase tripping
19~22 BO_Lockout_1 Binary output 1 of blocking auto-reclosure
23 COM Common terminal 2 for tripping contact
23~24 BO_Trp1P_2 Binary output 2 of single-phase tripping
23~25 BO_Trp3P_2 Binary output 2 of three-phase tripping
23~26 BO_Lockout_2 Binary output 2 of blocking auto-reclosure
27 COM Common terminal 3 for tripping contact
27~28 BO_Trp1P_3 Binary output 3 of single-phase tripping
27~29 BO_Trp3P_3 Binary output 3 of three-phase tripping
27~30 BO_Lockout_3 Binary output 3 of blocking auto-reclosure

Local signal Transfer signal 1 Transfer signal 2

BO_Fail_1 10 11
02 BO_Alm_Ch_1 BO_Alm_Ch_2
BO_Alm_Abnor_1 12 13
03 BO_Recv1_TS_1 BO_Recv2_TS_1
BO_Trp 14 09
04
BO_Cls 16 15
05 BO_Recv1_TS_2 BO_Recv2_TS_2
18 17
01

Load Shedding Auto-reclosing 1 Auto-reclosing 2

BO_Trp1p_3 BO_Trp1P_1 BO_Trp1P_2


28 20 24
BO_Trp3P_3 BO_Trp3P_1 BO_Trp3P_2
29 21 25
BO_BlkAR_3 BO_BlkAR_1 BO_BlkAR_2
30 22 26

27 19 23

Remote signal

BO_Fail_2
07
BO_Alm_Abnor_2
08

06

Figure 6.3-5 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

For local signal, they are magnetic latching signals, so they can be reset by pressing RESET
button to energize binary input [BI_RstTarg] or reset command from SAS via communication
channel.

When DC power supply of protective device is lost or there is internal fault occurs in the protective
device, protective device will be blocked. Failure alarm signal will be issued by closing the
normally closed contact BO_Fail_1, BO_Fail_2 and BO_Fail_3.

When protective device is in abnormal condition but still running, such as VT circuit failure, CT
circuit failure, and so on, protective device is not blocked. Abnormal alarm signal will be issued by
closing the normally open contact BO_Alm_Abnor_1 and BO_Alm_Abnor_2.

When there is any protective element operating to trip three-phase circuit breaker or single-phase
circuit breaker, trip signal will be issued by closing the normally open contact BO_Trp_1,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 107


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

BO_Trp_2 and BO_Trp_3. BO_Trp_1 and BO_Trp_2 can be used to initiate auto-reclosing of other
protective device by connecting with binary input [BI_ExTrp1P_AR].

When there is any protective element operating to trip three-phase circuit breaker, trip signal will
be issued by closing the normally open contact BO_Trp3P_1, BO_Trp3P_2 and BO_Trp3P_3.
BO_Trp3P_1 and BO_Trp3P_2 can be used to initiate auto-reclosing of other protective device by
connecting with binary input [BI_ExTrp3P_AR].

When the conditions that is used to block auto-reclosing is met, the normally open contact
BO_BlkAR_1, BO_BlkAR_2 and BO_BlkAR_3 will be closed.

Transfer signal relay retransmits transfer signals and provides two normally open contacts
respectively. When the binary input [VBI_Recv1_TS] or [VBI_Recv2_TS] is energized, these
contacts BO_Recv1_TS_1 and BO_Recv1_TS_2 or BO_Recv2_TS_1 and BO_Recv2_TS_2 will
be closed.

Channel alarm relay outputs channel alarm signal and provides two normally open contacts:
[BO_Alm_Ch_1] and [BO_Alm_Ch_2]. When the protective device does not receive the signal
from remote end, data frame is abnormal during data transmission, the settings related with
channel of protective device on both ends are wrong, including [Equip_ID], [ID_Local],
[ID_Remote] and [En_InnClock_ChA], or error rate of channel is greater than 0.1%, these contacts
will be closed.

6.3.9 BO Module

NR1551A

COM1 02 COM 01

COM2 04 03

06 TJA-1 05

TJA-2 08 TJB-1 07

TJB-2 10 TJC-1 09

TJC-2 12 HJ-1 11

14 13

COM5 16 TJA 15

TJC 18 TJB 17

COM3 20 TJA-3 19

TJC-3 22 TJB-3 21

COM4 24 TJA-4 23

TJC-4 26 TJB-4 25

HJ 28 HJ 27

HJ-2 30 HJ-2 29

Pin No. Sign Description


02 COM1 Common terminal 1 of tripping
02~05 BO_TrpA_1 Binary output 1 of tripping of phase A
02~07 BO_TrpB_1 Binary output 1 of tripping of phase B
02~09 BO_TrpC_1 Binary output 1 of tripping of phase C
04 COM2 Common terminal 2 of tripping

108 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

04~08 BO_TrpA_2 Binary output 2 of tripping of phase A


04~10 BO_TrpB_2 Binary output 2 of tripping of phase B
04~12 BO_TrpC_2 Binary output 2 of tripping of phase C
20 COM3 Common terminal 3 of tripping
20~19 BO_TrpA_3 Binary output 3 of tripping of phase A
20~21 BO_TrpB_3 Binary output 3 of tripping of phase B
20~22 BO_TrpC_3 Binary output 3 of tripping of phase C
24 COM4 Common terminal 4 of tripping
24~23 BO_TrpA_4 Binary output 4 of tripping of phase A
24~25 BO_TrpB_4 Binary output 4 of tripping of phase B
24~26 BO_TrpC_4 Binary output 4 of tripping of phase C
16 COM5 Common terminal of remote signal
16~15 BO_TrpA_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase A
16~17 BO_TrpB_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase B
16~18 BO_TrpC_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase C
01~11 BO_Cls_1 Binary output 1 of closing circuit breaker
27~28 BO_Cls_3 Binary output 3 of closing circuit breaker
29~30 BO_Cls_2 Binary output 2of closing circuit breaker

Tripp 1 Trip 2 Remote signal

BO_TrpA_1 BO_TrpA_2 BO_TrpA_5


05 08 15
BO_TrpB_5
17
BO_TrpB_1 BO_TrpB_2 BO_TrpC_5
07 10 18

16
BO_TrpC_1 BO_TrpC_2 BO_Cls_3
09 12 27

28

02 04

Trip 3 Trip 4 Reclosing 1

BO_TrpA_3 BO_TrpA_4 BO_Cls_1


19 23 11
BO_TrpB_3 BO_TrpB_4
21 25
BO_TrpC_3 BO_TrpC_4
22 26 01

20 24 Reclosing 2

BO_Cls_2
29

30

Figure 6.3-6 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

The second BO module provides five groups of phase-segregated trip contacts and three groups
of auto-reclosing contacts, which are all instantaneous operating contact. The normally open
contact BO_TrpA_1, BO_TrpB_1, BO_TrpC_1 and BO_Cls_1, are connected with the first group
of tripping coil and closing coil of interposing relay to trip and close circuit breaker respectively, for
example, CZX-12R. Others are used as remote signal, to initiate fault recorder and to initiate
circuit breaker failure protection. If there are two circuit breakers needed tripped, for example, 3/2

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 109


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

breaker arrangement, the normally open contact BO_TrpA_2, BO_TrpB_2 and BO_TrpC_2 are
used to trip the second circuit breaker.

6.3.10 BO Module

NR1551B

COM1 02 01

COM2 04 03

06 TJA-5 05

TJA-6 08 TJB-5 07

TJB-6 10 TJC-5 09

TJC-6 12 11

14 13

COM3 16 TJA-7 15

TJC-7 18 TJB-7 17

COM4 20 TJA-8 19

TJC-8 22 TJB-8 21

24 23

26 25

28 27

30 29

Pin No. Sign Description


02 COM1 Common terminal 1 of tripping
02~05 BO_TrpA_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase A
02~07 BO_TrpB_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase B
02~09 BO_TrpC_5 Binary output 5 of tripping of phase C
04 COM2 Common terminal 2 of tripping
04~08 BO_TrpA_6 Binary output 6 of tripping of phase A
04~10 BO_TrpB_6 Binary output 6 of tripping of phase B
04~12 BO_TrpC_6 Binary output 6 of tripping of phase C
16 COM3 Common terminal 3 of tripping
16~15 BO_TrpA_7 Binary output 7 of tripping of phase A
16~17 BO_TrpB_7 Binary output 7 of tripping of phase B
16~18 BO_TrpC_7 Binary output 7 of tripping of phase C
20 COM4 Common terminal 4 of tripping
20~19 BO_TrpA_8 Binary output 8 of tripping of phase A
20~21 BO_TrpB_8 Binary output 8 of tripping of phase B
20~22 BO_TrpC_8 Binary output 8 of tripping of phase C

110 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.3-7 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

When these contacts in the second module are not enough to used, another BO module can be
use as a expansion. Additional four groups of phase-segregated trip contacts can be gained.
Please declare firstly before ordering.

6.3.11 BO Module

NR1560A

BO1 02 BO1 01

BO2 04 BO2 03

06 05

08 07

BO3 10 BO3 09

BO4 12 BO4 11

BO5 14 BO5 13

BO6 16 BO6 15

BO7 18 BO7 17

BO8 20 BO8 19

BO9 22 BO9 21

BO10 24 BO10 23

26 25

28 27

30 29

Pin No. Sign Description


01~02 BO1 Reserved binary output
03~04 BO2 Reserved binary output
Binary output 1 of three-phase tripping and blocking
09~10 BO_Trp3P_Lockout_1
automatic reclosure
Binary output 2 of three-phase tripping and blocking
11~12 BO_Trp3P_Lockout_2
automatic reclosure
13~14 BO_Inprog_AR_1 Binary output 1 of automatic reclosure in progress
15~16 BO_Inprog_AR_2 Binary output 2 of automatic reclosure in progress

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 111


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Binary output 1 of receiving the external signal of blocking


17~18 BO_BI_Lockout_1
automatic reclosure
Binary output 2 of receiving the external signal of blocking
19~20 BO_BI_Lockout_2
automatic reclosure
21~22 BO_Fail_AR_1 Binary output 1 of failure in auto-reclosing
23~24 BO_Fail_AR_2 Binary output 2 of failure in auto-reclosing

Reserved binary output 3-Pole tripping and Lockout

BO1 BO_Trp3P_Lockout_1
01 09

02 10
BO2 BO_Trp3P_Lockout_2
03 11

04 12

Auto-reclosing in progress Blocking auto-reclosing

BO_Inprog_AR_1 BO_BI_Lockout_1
13 17

14 18
BO_Inprog_AR_2 BO_BI_Lockout_2
15 19

16 20

Fail in auto-reclosing

BO_Fail_AR_1 BO_Fail_AR_2
21 23

22 24

Figure 6.3-8 Output contacts and terminals of BO module

The fourth module can provide ten contacts used for 3-pole tripping and lockout, blocking
auto-reclosing and so on. Figure 6.3-8 shows output contacts and corresponding terminals
provided by this module.

6.3.12 PWR Module


The slot number of power supply module is 0. View from the back of device, the last module is
the power supply module.

Terminal 001~003 of power supply module are the dry contacts for failure and alarm output by the
device. Terminal 001 is the common terminal, the failure contact is a normally closed contact and
the alarm contact is a normally open contact.

Terminals 004-006 of power supply module are the other group of dry contacts for failure and
alarm.

Terminals 007 and 008 of power supply module are the output terminals of 24V power supply, the
24 V power supply is mainly used for the 24V opto-coupler input module. Among which, the
terminal 007 is for 24V+ and the terminal 008 is for 24V-. The rated current output by the power
supply is 200mA.

Terminals 010 and 011of power supply module are the power supply input terminals. In which, the
terminal 010 is for DC + and 011 is for DC -. The rated input voltages of power supply are adaptive
220V or 110V. For other voltage grades, special purchase order will be required. Before delivery,

112 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

please check the rated input voltage of the power supply module is the same as the voltage of
control power supply.

The power supply module provides terminal 012 and ground screw for the grounding of device.
Firstly, please connect the terminal 012 to the ground screw, and then use special ground wire to
connect it to the grounding copper busbar of cabinet. Good grounding is the most important
measure for keeping the device free from electromagnetic interference, hence, before the
application of the device, we must ensure that it has been well grounded.

NR1301A

COM1 01
BO_Fail_1
BSJ1 02 02
BO_Alm_Abnor_1
BJJ1 03 03

COM2 04 01
BO_Fail_2
BSJ2 05 05
BO_Alm_Abnor_2
BJJ2 06 06

24V+ 07 04

24V- 08

09

DC+ 10

DC- 11

GND 12

Grounding Screw
Grounding Bus

Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of PWR module

Pin No. Sign Description


01 Common_1 Common terminal 1
02 BO_Fail_1 Binary output 1 of failure signal
03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Binary output 1 of alarm signal
04 Common_2 Common terminal 2
05 BO_Fail_2 Binary output 2 of failure signal
06 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Binary output 2 of alarm signal
07 Opto_L+ Positive pole of power supply for opto-coupler (24V)
08 Opto_L- Negative pole of power supply for opto-coupler (24V)
09 Blank
10 Positive pole of power supply for the protective device
Pwr+
(220V/110V)
11 Negative pole of power supply for the protective device
Pwr-
(220V/110V)
12 GND Ground

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 113


Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.4 Display Panel

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, indicator lamp and ARM
processor. The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display
module, keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through serial port etc. The
liquid crystal display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting,
which has a user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

114 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.1 General Description

By adoption of PCS-PC software, it is able to make binary input and binary output configuration,
LED indicator configuration and programming logic for PCS-931.

7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software

PCS-PC software, assorted with UAPC platform device, is developed in order to meet customers
demand on functions of device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects
substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one
substation joint to govern many ones of the devices. The software provides on-line and off-line
functions: on-line mode: Ethernet connected with the device to support IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
and downloading of binary files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration.
In addition, it also supports programmable logic to meet customers corresponding demand. For
any detail, please refer to Instruction Manual of PCS-PC Auxiliary Software.

7.3 Protective Device Configuration

7.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators


1. This protection device provides 20 LED indicators, besides 10 defined LED indicators, such as,
HEALTHY LED, ALARM LED and TRIP A LED and so on, another 10 LEDs can be
configured by users as required.

2. The right tree structure of the column in the software provides


elements for lighting up, including protection elements, alarm elements and binary input
elements.

3. Use the column to choose whether hold LED or not. In case of Yes selected,
resetting must be performed by the resetting button once it is lit. In case of No selected, the
signals will reset automatically once the input signal returns.

4. If users hope the User_defined_LED_1 is lit and held when DPFC differential element
operates, configure it as per the following picture.

5. The label of the User_defined_LED_1 can be edited by double-click it.

6. The signal in the column of Signal can be moved up, moved down, inserted or deleted by
right-click, and then left-click to execute corresponding command (up, down, insert, delete).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 115


Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input


1. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column

on the left of the interface.

2. The next step is to set time delay and broadening time


(unit: ms) of the corresponding binary inputs, which can be set separately.

3. The column at the right is the corresponding binary


inputs provided, which needs the user to configure. User can draw it from the right list.

4. The signal in the column of Destination can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.

116 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output


1. The function is applied for configuration of binary output terminals of BO module (NR1521B) of
the protective device. There are total 11 binary output contacts.

2. Users can draw the elements from the column at the right to
point to a or several binary output contact. The optional signals include: Trip Elements, Alarm,
Binary Change and Other Type (Reserved).

3. In the event that user want to use the contact as alarm


output contacts of channel A abnormality, find the corresponding alarm element in the right
tree structure and draw it to the corresponding position as below.

4. The signal added in the column of Source can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 117


Chapter 7 Configurable Function

118 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

Chapter 8 Settings
The equipment has 10 setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.

Note!

All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.

8.1 Equipment Parameters

Overview

Table 8.1-1 Equipment parameters

No. Item Range


1 IP_Addr_NetA
2 Subnet_Mask_A
3 En_NetA
4 IP_Addr_NetB
5 Subnet_Mask_B
6 En_NetB
7 IP_Addr_NetC
8 Subnet_Mask_C
9 En_NetC
10 IP_Addr_NetD
11 Subnet_Mask_D
12 En_NetD
13 Comm_Addr 0~255
14 COM1_Baud 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
15 COM2_Baud 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
16 COM1_Protocol 0, 1 or 2
17 COM2_Protocol 0, 1 or 2
18 En_BlkComm 0 or 1
19 Printer_Baud 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
20 En_Auto_Print 0 or 1
21 En_HiSpeed_Print 0 or 1
22 Opt_TimeSync 0, 1 or 2

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 119


Chapter 8 Settings

No. Item Range


23 En_DualNet_GOOSE 0 or 1

Setting Description

1. IP_Addr_NetA, IP_Addr_NetB, IP_Addr_NetC, IP_Addr_NetD

IP address of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

2. Subnet_Mask_A, Subnet_Mask_B, Subnet_Mask_C, Subnet_Mask_D

Subnet mask of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

3. En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA

Put Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D in service

They are used for Ethernet communication based on the 103 protocol. When the IEC 61850
protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.

4. Comm_Addr

Communication address between the protective device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485

5. COM1_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 1

6. COM2_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 2

7. COM1_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 1

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2: Modbus Protocol

8. COM2_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 2

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2: Modbus Protocol

9. En_BlkComm

It is set as 1 when the device is in maintenance. During such period, the fault report due to test
will not be sent upstream through communication ports, while local display and printing will not be
affected.

It is set as 0 when the device is in service. The relation between this setting and binary input
[BI_BlkComm] is OR, i.e. as long as one of them is set as 1, such information as fault report
and waveform will not be sent upstream.

120 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

10. Printer_Baud

Baud rate of printer port

11. En_Auto_Print

If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as 1. Otherwise, it
should be set to 0.

12. En_HiSpeed_Print

It is set as 0 for common printing with high definition, while it is set as 1 for high-speed printing.

13. Opt_TimeSync

It is set as "0", 1 or 2 for different external clock source.

0: PPS (pulse per second) differential

1: IRIG-B differential

2: PPM (pulse per minute) via external contact

14. En_DualNet_GOOSE

1: Enable both net A link and net B link of the GOOSE module, and then the GOOSE module is
able to work in dual Ethernet mode.

0: Disable net B link of the GOOSE module, and then the GOOSE module can only work in single
Ethernet mode.

8.2 System Parameters

Overview

Table 8.2-1 System parameters

No. Item Range Set Value


1 ActiveGrp 1~10 1
2 Equip_ID Line2
3 I1N 0~9999 A 1200A
4 I2N 1A or 5 A 1A
5 U1N 0~1200 kV 220V
6 En_BI_GOOSE 0 or 1

1. ActiveGrp

It is current active setting group. 10 setting groups are provided for selecting, group number from 0
to 9. Equipment parameter is shared for 10 setting groups.

2. Equip_ID

It is intended to set Chinese character field codes (12 bits) or ASCII codes (last 6 bits), which can

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 121


Chapter 8 Settings

be recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages.

3. I1N

Primary rated current of CT;

4. I2N

Secondary rated current of CT;

5. U1N

Primary rated voltage of VT;

6. En_BI_GOOSE

This setting is usually used for the case that GOOSE scheme is adopted in the bay level of digital
substation. When it is set as 1, the binary signal is valid received from GOOSE net and is invalid
received via opto-coupler, but corresponding binary input change report is still generated if the
status of binary input is changed. When it is set as 0, the binary signal is invalid received from
GOOSE net and is valid received via opto-coupler, but corresponding binary input change report is
still generated if the status of binary input is changed.

8.3 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT.

Overview

Table 8.3-1 Protection settings

No. Item Remark Range Unit


current setting of DPFC current fault
1 I_DPFC_OC_FD (0.02~10)In A
detector element
current setting of zero sequence current
2 I_ROC_FD (0.02~10)In A
fault detector element
impedance setting of DPFC distance
3 Z_DPFC (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
element
4 K_Corr_CT current ratio factor of CT 0.20~10.00
the minimum pickup current setting of
5 I_Diff (0.02~30.00)In A
current differential protection
current setting of differential protection
6 I_Diff_CTS (0.02~30.00)In A
for CT circuit failure
7 ID_Local ID of local protection device 0~65535
8 ID_Remote ID of remote protection device 0~65535
zero-sequence compensation
9 K0 0.00~2.00
coefficient
10 I_OC_PSBR current setting for power swing blocking (0.02~40.00)In A

122 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

impedance setting of zone 1 of


11 Z_PG1 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-ground distance element
impedance setting of zone 2 of
12 Z_PG2 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-ground distance element
time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground
13 t_PG2 0.00~10.00 s
distance element
impedance setting of zone 3 of
14 Z_PG3 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-ground distance element
time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-ground
15 t_PG3 0.00~10.00 s
distance element
impedance setting of zone 1 of
16 Z_PP1 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-phase distance element
impedance setting of zone 2 of
17 Z_PP2 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-phase distance element
time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase
18 t_PP2 0.00~10.00 s
distance element
impedance setting of zone 3 of
19 Z_PP3 (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
phase-to-phase distance element
time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-phase
20 t_PP3 0.00~10.00 s
distance element
Impedance setting of reversal distance
21 Z_Rev (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
element
22 t_Rev time delay of reversal distance element 0.00~10.00 s
restrict impedance of the reach of
23 R_Blinder (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
distance element
resistance setting of zone 1 of
24 R1_Quad quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
element
resistance setting of zone 2 of
25 R2_Quad quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
element
resistance setting of zone 3 of
26 R3_Quad quadrilateral characteristic distance (0.00~220.00)/In ohm
element
phase angle of line positive sequence
27 phi1_Reach 30.00~89.00 Deg
impedance
phase angle of line zero sequence
28 phi0_Reach 30.00~89.00 Deg
impedance
phase shift of zone 1, 2 of
29 phi_Shift_ZPG 0~30 Deg
phase-to-ground distance element
phase shift of zone 1, 2 of
30 phi_Shift_ZPP 0~30 Deg
phase-to-phase distance element
31 I_ROC1 current setting of stage 1 of directional (0.02~40.00)In A

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 123


Chapter 8 Settings

zero-sequence overcurrent element


current setting of stage 2 of directional
32 I_ROC2 (0.02~40.00)In A
zero sequence overcurrent element
time delay of stage 2 of directional
33 t_ROC2 0.00~10.00 s
zero-sequence overcurrent element
current setting of stage 3 of directional
34 I_ROC3 (0.02~40.00)In A
zero-sequence overcurrent element
time delay of stage 3 of directional
35 t_ROC3 0.00~10.00 s
zero-sequence overcurrent element
current setting of stage 4 of directional
36 I_ROC4 (0.02~40.00)In A
zero-sequence overcurrent element
time delay of stage 4 of directional
37 t_ROC4 0.00~10.00 s
zero-sequence overcurrent element
current setting of inverse-time
38 I_InvROC (0.02~40.00)In A
zero-sequence overcurrent protection
time delay of inverse-time
39 t_InvROC 0.00~10.00 s
zero-sequence overcurrent protection
current setting of accelerated stage of
40 I_ROC_SOTF (0.02~40.00)In A
zero sequence overcurrent element
phase current setting of overcurrent
41 I_OC_VTS (0.02~40.00)In A
element for VTS
zero-sequence current setting of
42 I_ROC_VTS (0.02~40.00)In A
overcurrent element for VTS
time setting of phase or zero-sequence
43 t_OC/ROC_VTS 0.00~10.00 s
overcurrent element for VTS
current setting of stage 1 of directional
44 I_OC1 (0.02~40.00)In A
phase overcurrent protection
time delay of stage 1 of directional
45 t_OC1 0.00~10.00 s
phase overcurrent protection
current setting of stage 2 of directional
46 I_OC2 (0.02~40.00)In A
phase overcurrent protection
time delay of stage 2 of directional
47 t_OC2 0.00~10.00 s
phase overcurrent protection
current setting of stage 3 of directional
48 I_OC3 (0.02~40.00)In A
phase overcurrent protection
time delay of stage 3 of directional
49 t_OC3 0.00~10.00 s
phase overcurrent protection
the option of inverse-time characteristic
50 Opt_InvOC3 for the stage 3 of phase overcurrent 1~3
protection.
phase current setting of stage 1 of (0.02~40.00)In A
51 I_OC_BFP1
breaker failure protection

124 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

zero-sequence current setting of stage (0.02~40.00)In A


52 I_ROC_BFP1
1 of breaker failure protection
negative-sequence current setting of (0.02~40.00)In A
53 I_NegOC_BFP1
stage 1 of breaker failure protection
phase current setting of stage 2 of (0.02~40.00)In A
54 I_OC_BFP2
breaker failure protection
zero-sequence current setting stage 2 (0.02~40.00)In A
55 I_ROC_BFP2
of breaker failure protection
negative-sequence current setting of (0.02~40.00)In A
56 I_NegOC_BFP2
stage 2 of breaker failure protection
time delay setting of retripping local 0.00~10.00 s
57 t_BFP1 breaker by stage 1 of breaker failure
protection
time delay setting of tripping adjacent 0.00~10.00 s
58 t_BFP2 breaker by stage 2 of breaker failure
protection
phase difference limit of synchronism
59 phi_Diff_SynChk 0~89 Deg
check
fixed phase difference between bus
60 phi_Fix_Diff 0~359 Deg
voltage and line voltage
frequency difference limit of
61 f_Diff_SynChk 0.02~1.00 Hz
synchronism check
V_Diff_SynChk voltage difference limit of synchronism
62 (0.02~0.80)Un V
check
voltage threshold of no-voltage check
63 V_Dead (0.05~0.80)Un V
condition
voltage threshold of voltage check
64 V_Live (0.50~1.00)Un V
condition
time delay of voltage and no-voltage
65 t_VoltChk 0.01~50.00 s
check condition
time delay of synchronism check
66 t_SynChk 0.01~50.00 s
condition
67 t_1P_AR time delay of single-pole auto-reclosing 0.00~50.00 s
68 t_3P_AR time delay of three-pole auto-reclosing 0.00~50.00 s
time delay of circuit breaker in closed
69 t_CBClsd_AR 0.00~250.00 s
state before reclosing
waiting time before announcing
70 t_Unsuc_AR 0.00~250.00 s
unsuccessful auto-reclosing
maximum wait time for synchronizing
71 t_Wait_SynChk 0.00~250.00 s
window
72 t_PW_AR circuit breaker closing pulse length 0.00~50.00 s
73 t_Reclaim_AR minimum time required between 0.00~250.00 s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 125


Chapter 8 Settings

successive reclosing sequences


74 X1L positive sequence reactance of the line (0.00~550)/In ohm
75 R1L positive sequence resistance of the line (0.00~550)/In ohm
76 X0L zero sequence reactance of the line (0.00~550)/In ohm
77 R0L zero sequence resistance of the line (0.00~550)/In ohm
positive-sequence capacitive
78 XC1L (40~65535)/In ohm
impedance of the line
zero-sequence capacitive impedance of
79 XC0L (40~65535)/In ohm
the line
impedance setting of reactor of local
80 Z_Reac_Local (40~65535)/In ohm
line
impedance setting of ground reactor of
81 Z_GndReac_Local (40~65535)/In ohm
local line
impedance setting of reactor of remote
82 Z_Reac_Remote (40~65535)/In ohm
line
impedance setting of ground reactor of
83 Z_GndReac_Remote (40~65535)/In ohm
remote line
84 LineLength total length of the line 0.00~655.35 kM
85 Line_ID number of the line 0-65535

Setting Description

1. I_DPFC_OC_FD

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This value should be greater than maximum variation of load current and
typically 0.2 In. For line with wide variation of load current like those for electric railway, heavy
rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the setting should be increased properly so that frequent starting
of the equipment could be avoided.

2. I_ROC_FD

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: It shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current. Setting it
based on same primary current on both ends.

3. Z_DPFC

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: it shall be 80~85% impedance of whole line. For double-circuit lines, 70% of the
line impedance is recommended. However, for short line, it is recommended that DPFC distance
protection should be disabled if the set value is smaller than 1/In.

4. I_Diff

Setting step: 0.01A

126 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

Setting principle: it shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the maximum load
conditions, and 400A~700A (primary current) is recommended. When the logic setting
[En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, it can be appropriately increased, and 500A~800A (primary
current) is recommended.

5. ID_Local

6. ID_Remote

Used to confirm that equipments at both ends of line are compatible. The end of which setting
[ID_Local] should be same as the [ID_Remote] of the other and the greater [ID_Local] between
the two ends is chosen as a master end for sampling synchronism, the other is a slave end. If the
setting [ID_Local] is set as same as [ID_Remote], that means the equipment in loopback testing
state.

7. K_Corr_CT

The ratio of CTs on two terminals of the line could be different. it could be corrected by setting
[K_Corr_CT].

Setting principle: Suppose CT ratio, Terminal M: kM=IM1n : IM2n; Terminal N: is and kN=IN1n : IN2n

IM1n: primary rated current of terminal M, IM2n: secondary rated current of terminal M

IN1n: primary rated current of terminal N, IN2n: secondary rated current of terminal N

If IM1n>= IN1n, then set [K_Corr_CT]

Terminal M: [K_Corr_CT]=1.00

Terminal N: [K_Corr_CT]=IN1n / IM1n

For example:

Terminal M: CT ratio=2500:1, its setting [K_Corr_CT] is set as 1.0

Terminal N: CT ratio=1250:5, its setting [K_Corr_CT] is set as 0.5

8. I_Diff_CTS

Setting step: 0.01A

When CT circuit fails, this setting is the threshold value of differential protection instead of the
setting [I _Diff] if the logic setting [En_CTSBlkDiff] is set as 0.

9. K0

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: K0=(Z0LZ1L)/3Z1L, where Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance
of the line respectively. Actual measurement value is suggested adopted, but calculated value with
0.05 subtracted from can also be used if there is not actual measurement value.

10. I_OC_PSBR

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 127


Chapter 8 Settings

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This current setting should be greater than maximum load current of the line. The
sensitivity coefficient takes 1.1.

11. Z_PG1

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line and
should be decreased properly for line with mutual inductance. The recommended value is 0.7
times the impedance of the line. The setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation
when a fault occurs in the remote bus of line.

12. Z_PP1

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line. The
setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation when a fault occurs in the remote
bus of line.

13. Z_PG2

14. Z_PG3

15. Z_PP2

16. Z_PP3

17. t_PG2

18. t_PG3

19. t_PP2

20. t_PP3

Setting principle: Setting of the impedance and time delay of these zones should meet
requirements between various zones and operation should be ensured even for fault at end of the
line.

21. Z_Rev

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: it should be 50% impedance of the whole line.

22. t_Rev

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: it should meet requirement between zone 3 distance element and busbar
protection.

23. R_Blinder

128 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load
conditions and it should meet the requirement of sensitivity, usually take 0.7 as sensitive
coefficient.

24. R1_Quad

25. R2_Quad

26. R3_Quad

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: The proposed limitation of Z/R ratio is 1/4, in another word, it is recommended
that Z/R ratio is not smaller than 1/4.

Besides [R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] and [R3_Quad] should be in the range of (0.05~200)/In and ward
load impedance, these settings are recommended to satisfy the following condition:
[R1_Quad][4Z_PG1], [R2_Quad][4Z_PG2], [R3_Quad][4Z_PG3]. But this limitation is not
imperative. So during the calculation of the settings [R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] and [R3_Quad], the
consideration includes: the setting range of (0.05~200)/In, the load impedance and the proposed
limitation of Z/R ratio.

27. phi1_Reach

28. phi0_Reach

Setting step: 1

Phase angle of positive and zero sequence impedance of the line. Set as they should be.

29. phi_Shift_ZPG

Setting step: 1

Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-ground distance element. Recommended value: 30for
length of the line < 10 km, 15for length 10 km and 0for length 40 km.

30. phi_Shift_ZPP

Setting step: 1

Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-phase distance element. Recommended value: 30for
length of the line < 2 km, 15for length 2 km and 0for length 10 km.

31. I_ROC1

32. I_ROC2

33. t_ROC2

34. I_ROC3

35. t_ROC3

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 129


Chapter 8 Settings

36. I_ROC4

37. t_ROC4

Current settings and time delay of stage 1~4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

38. I_InvROC

It is set according to the fault condition via maximum fault resistance (i.e. maximum fault
resistance takes 100 for 220kV transmission line and 300 for 500kV transmission line), and it
shall be greater than the maximum unbalanced current during the normal operation condition,
usually not greater than 300A.

39. t_InvROC

It is the time constant of normal IDMT equation and the following criterion shall be met:

t 0ZDinv TS + t

t 0ZDinv t 0ZD2XL + t

Where:

t 0ZDinv : The time delay of the inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

t 0ZD2XL : The time delay of zone 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection in the

adjacent line

t : The extra time delay

TS : The time delay for 1-pole reclosing

40. I_ROC_SOTF

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to ground fault at end of the line.

41. I_OC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of phase overcurrent element for VTS.

42. I_ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of zero sequence overcurrent element for VTS.

43. t_OC/ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01s

130 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

Time setting of phase and zero sequence overcurrent elements for VTS.

44. I_OC1

45. t_OC1

46. I_OC2

47. t_OC2

48. I_OC3

49. t_OC3

Current settings and time delay of stage 1~4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

50. Opt_InvOC3

The option of inverse-time characteristic for stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection

1: standard inverse

2: very inverse

3: extremely inverse

51. I_OC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Phase current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection

52. I_ROC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Zero-sequence current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection

53. I_NegOC_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01A

Negative-sequence current setting of stage 1 of breaker failure protection

54. I_OC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

Phase current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection

55. I_ROC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

Zero-sequence current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection

56. I_NegOC_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01A

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 131


Chapter 8 Settings

Negative-sequence current setting of stage 2 of breaker failure protection

57. t_BFP1

Setting step: 0.01s

The breaker protected directly by the breaker failure protection will be re-tripped with this delay
when the breaker failure protection operates.

58. t_BFP2

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay of tripping all adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar and remote end
circuit breaker by stage 2 of breaker failure protection.

59. phi_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 1

Phase difference limit for synchronism check

60. phi_Fix_Diff

Setting step: 1

The line voltage can be phase or phase-to-phase voltage, and this setting is referred to the angle
that line voltage is lagged behind the busbar voltage during synchronism check.

For example, in case busbar voltage adopts phase A voltage, the fixed phase difference between
UB and UL is as follows:

UL A B C AB BC CA
phi_Fix_Diff 0 120 240 330 90 30

61. f_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01Hz

Frequency difference limit for synchronism check

62. V_Diff_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01V

Voltage difference limit for synchronism check

63. V_Dead

Setting step: 0.01V

Setting principle: the setting must be greater than the coupling voltage produced due to coupling of
adjacent lines, and is generally set as 30%Un.

64. V_Live

Setting step: 0.01V

132 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to actual conditions, and is generally set as
80%Un.

65. t_VoltChk

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting is generally set as 0.05s.

66. t_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting shall be set according to actual requirements. In case frequency
difference value is not adopted, the setting shall be set in conjunction with the requirements of
frequency difference.

67. t_1P_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to system stability requirement, meanwhile,
arc-extinguishing of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered.
Generally, this setting is greater than 0.5s, 1.0s is recommended.

68. t_3P_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: the setting should be set according to system stability requirement,
arc-extinguishing of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered.
In addition, possibility for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different
time limit should be taken into consideration. This setting for power plant outlets or intensive
network is generally set as 10s.

69. t_CBClsd_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay of circuit breaker in closed state before reclosing

70. t_Unsuc_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker.

71. t_Wait_SynChk

Setting step: 0.01s

The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. In case the synchronism
check is unsuccessful after exceeding this setting, the auto-reclosing will be blocked.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 133


Chapter 8 Settings

72. t_PW_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

Duration time of circuit breaker closing pulse length. The setting must be greater than the
reclosing time of circuit breaker.

73. t_Reclaim_AR

Setting step: 0.01s

The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation. After resetting, the auto-reclosing
can implement the next reclosing.

74. X1L

75. R1L

76. X0L

77. R0L

Setting step: 0.01

Positive sequence and zero sequence reactance and resistance of the line. Parameter of the
transmission line, used for calculation of fault location.

78. XC1L

79. XC0L

Setting step: 1

Setting principle: when the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 1, they must be set
according to actual parameters of total transmission line (secondary value). If no actual measured
value is provided, the following table can be as a reference.

Capacitive impedance and current of overhead per 100KM based on different voltage class

Voltage Class XC1 XC0 Capacitance current


220kV 3700 5260 34A
330kV 2860 4170 66A
500kV 2590 3790 111A
750kV 2242 3322 193A

However, when the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 1, they can be set as any value
within its setting range, or [XC0L]=1.5Un/[I_Pkp_Diff]; [XC1L]=Un/[I_Pkp_Diff].

It is worth of attention that [XC1L] must be smaller than [XC0L].

80. Z_Reac_Local

Setting step: 1

Setting principle: if shunt reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the

134 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

secondary value of shunt reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.

81. Z_GndReac_Local

Setting step: 1

Setting principle: if ground reactor is equipped with the local substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of ground reactor of local substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.

82. Z_Reac_Remote

Setting step: 1

Setting principle: if shunt reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of shunt reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000. When
the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within its
setting range.

83. Z_GndReac_Remote

Setting step: 1

Setting principle: if ground reactor is equipped with the remote substation, it shall be set as the
secondary value of ground reactor of remote substation, otherwise, it can be set as 6000.
When the logic setting [En_CapCurrComp] is set as 0, this setting can be set as any value within
its setting range.

84. LineLength

Total length of the line. The actual total length of the line km, used for calculation of fault location.

85. Line_ID

Number of the line. The actual identification number of the transmission line in site, only used for
printing report.

Note!

For impedance setting, even if some zones of distance element are disabled, these
settings must meet the following relation:

[Z_PP3][Z_PP2][Z_PP1]

[Z_PG3][Z_PG2][Z_PG1]

Impedance setting of zone 3 of distance element should be sensitive to fault at end of the
line.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 135


Chapter 8 Settings

Note!

All zero-sequence current settings should be greater than that of zero-sequence current
fault detector element. These settings must meet the following relation:

[I_ROC1][I_ROC2][I_ROC3][I_ROC4][I_ROC_FD]

[I_OC1][I_OC2][I_OC3]

8.4 Logic Settings

These logic settings are used to configure protective function of the protective device. They can be
set as 1 or 0. Setting as 1 means that the corresponding protective function is enabled or valid,
while setting as 0 means that the corresponding protective function is disabled or invalid.

Overview

Table 8.4-1 Logic settings

No. Item Remark


enable DPFC distance protection
1 En_Z_DPFC 1: enable
0: disable
enable differential protection of channel A
2 En_DiffP_ChA 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of DPFC current differential element
3 En_DPFC_Diff1 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of DPFC current differential element
4 En_DPFC_Diff2 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of steady-state current differential element
5 En_Stdy_Diff1 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of steady-state current differential element1:
6 En_Stdy_Diff2 enable
0: disable
enable zero-sequence current differential element
7 En_REF 1: enable
0: disable
enable phase-segregated inter-tripping element
8 En_PhSeg_RecvTT 1: enable
0: disable
enable accelerated inter-tripping element
9 En_3P_RecvTT 1: enable
0: disable
enable capacitive current compensation
10 En_CompCurr
1: enable

136 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

0: disable
enable differential protection blocked during CT circuit
failure
11 En_CTSBlkDiff
1: enable
0: disable
enable inner clock of channel A
12 En_InnClock_ChA 1: enable
0: disable
transfer trip controlled by local fault detector
13 En_FD_Ctrl_TT 1: enable
0: disable
primary voltage of VT deriving from line voltage
14 En_LineVT 1: from line VT
0: from busbar VT
enable PSBR for zone 1,2 of distance element
15 En_PSBR 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance element
16 En_ZPG1 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance element
17 En_ZPG2 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance element
18 En_ZPG3 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance element
19 En_ZPP1 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance element
20 En_ZPP2 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 3 of phase-to-phase distance element
21 En_ZPP3 1: enable
0: disable
enable phase-to-ground reversal distance element
22 En_ZPG_Rev 1: enable
0: disable
enable phase-to-phase reversal distance element
23 En_ZPP_Rev 1: enable
0: disable
enable restrict impedance measured of line load
24 En_Blinder 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 1 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance
protection
25 En_ZPG1_Quad
1: enable
0: disable

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 137


Chapter 8 Settings

enable zone 2 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance


protection
26 En_ZPG2_Quad
1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 3 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance
protection
27 En_ZPG3_Quad
1: enable
0: disable
enable the function of binary input for enabling/disabling
28 En_BI_Z1_Vld
zone 1 of distance protection
enable zone 2 of distance element for SOTF when 3-pole AR
29 En_Z2SOTF_AR3P 1: enable
0: disable
enable zone 3 of distance element for SOTF when 3-pole AR
30 En_Z3SOTF_AR3P 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection
31 En_ROC1
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of directional zero -sequence overcurrent
protection
32 En_ROC2
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection
33 En_ROC3
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection
34 En_ROC4
1: enable
0: disable
enable direction blocking to stage 3 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection
35 En_Dir_ROC3
1: enable
0: disable
enable direction blocking to stage 4 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection
36 En_Dir_ROC4
1: enable
0: disable
enable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
37 En_InvROC 1: enable
0: disable
enable inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
38 En_Dir_InvROC controlled by direction element
1: enable

138 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

0: disable
enable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection accelerated operating
39 En_ROC3_SOTF
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection accelerated operating
40 En_ROC4_SOTF
1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection
41 En_OC1 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection
42 En_OC2 1: enable
0: disable
enable stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection
43 En_OC3 1: enable
0: disable
enable direction blocking to stage 1 of directional phase
overcurrent protection
44 En_Dir_OC1
1: enable
0: disable
enable direction blocking to stage 2 of directional phase
overcurrent protection
45 En_Dir_OC2
1: enable
0: disable
enable direction blocking to stage 3 of directional phase
overcurrent protection
46 En_Dir_OC3
1: enable
0: disable
enable inverse-time characteristic for stage 3 of phase
overcurrent protection
47 En_InvOC3
1:inverse time
0: definite time
enable breaker failure protection
48 En_BFP 1: enable
0: disable
enable zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure
protection initiated by single-phase tripping contact
49 En_ROC_1P_BFP
1: enable
0: disable
enable zero-sequence current criterion of breaker failure
protection initiated by three-phase tripping contact
50 En_ROC_BFP
1: enable
0: disable
51 En_NegOC_BFP enable negative-sequence current criterion of breaker failure

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 139


Chapter 8 Settings

protection initiated by three-phase tripping contact


1: enable
0: disable
enable current criterion for stage 1 and stage 2 of breaker
failure protection
52 En_BFP_12
1: enable
0: disable
enable three-phase tripping mode
53 En_3PTrip 1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-phase zone 2
of distance protection operating
54 En_ZPP2_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-ground zone 2
of distance protection operating
55 En_ZPG2_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 2 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating
56 En_ROC2_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 3 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating
57 En_ROC3_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 1 of directional
phase overcurrent protection operating to trip three-phase
58 En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR circuit breaker
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 2 of directional
phase overcurrent protection operating to trip three-phase
59 En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR circuit breaker
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when selection of faulty
phase fails
60 En_PhSF_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked under pole discrepancy
condition
61 En_PDF_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault
62 En_MPF_Blk_AR
happens

140 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault
happens
63 En_3PF_Blk_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage as
synchronism voltage
64 En_PhVolt_Syn
1: phase voltage
0: phase-to-phase voltage
enable synchronism check
65 En_SynChk_AR 1: enable
0: disable
enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check
66 En_DdB_DdL_AR 1: enable
0: disable
enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check
67 En_LvB_DdL_AR 1: enable
0: disable
enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check
68 En_DdB_LvL_AR 1: enable
0: disable
enable AR without voltage check and synchronism check
69 En_NoChk_AR 1: enable
0: disable
enable auto-reclosing
70 En_AR 1: enable
0: disable
select AR mode by logic setting
71 En_SetOpt_AR 1: AR mode determined by internal logic settings
0: AR mode determined by external binary inputs
enable 1-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting
[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
72 En_1P_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable 3-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting
[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
73 En_3P_AR
1: enable
0: disable
enable 1/3-pole auto-reclosing mode when the logic setting
[En_SetOpt_AR] set as 1
74 En_1/3P_AR
1: enable
0: disable

Setting Description

1. En_Z_DPFC

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 141


Chapter 8 Settings

For short transmission line, if the secondary value of line impedance is less than 1/IN, DPFC
distance protection should be disabled.

2. En_FD_Ctrl_TT

If the setting is set as 1, transfer tripping controlled by local fault detector. Local trip circuit could
be active by remote command (i.e. [VBI_RecvTT]=1) only when local fault detector initiates. if do
not use transfer tripping, the setting should be set as 1.

3. En_LineVT

If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement comes from line side (for example, 3/2
breaker), it should be set as 1. If three-phase voltage comes from busbar side, it should be set as
0.

1: Three phase voltage is from line voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from bus
voltage

0: Three phase voltage is from bus voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from line
voltage

Note!

The setting must be set carefully. The no-voltage check and the synchronous check will
determine the locations of line voltage and busbar voltage on the basis of the setting. If the
setting is mistaken, the mistaken judgment may be made.

4. En_PSBR

The function of power swing blocking for zone 1,2 of distance element;

1: enable; zone 1,2 of distance element is controlled by PSB element.

0: disable; zone 1,2 of distance element is not controlled by PSBR element, and power swing
blocking for zone 1,2 of distance element is released all along.

5. En_Z2SOTF_AR3P

6. En_Z3SOTF_AR3P

If the setting is set as 1, zone2, 3 of distance element for auto-reclosing SOTF is enabled. If the
power swing does not occur after reclosing, the corresponding zone of distance protection which is
not controlled by power swing block will trip after a shorter time delay than [t_PG2] or [t_PP2] and
[t_PG3] or [t_PP3].

7. En_3P_Trip

If it is set as 1, three-pole tripping will be implemented for any fault but auto-reclosing is not
blocked.

8. En_SetOpt_AR

When the setting is set as 1, AR mode can be selected by logic settings [En_1P_AR], single-pole

142 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Settings

AR, [En_3P_AR], three-pole AR, and [En_1/3P_AR], single-pole and three-pole AR. Conversely, if
it is set as 0, AR mode can be selected by switch on the panel. Please refer to section 6.3.6.

8.5 Equipment VEBI Settings

Virtual enable binary input (VEBI) is a kind of special logic setting to enable protection functions.
These virtual binary inputs can be configured through local HMI or remote PC, no matter logic
setting [En_Remote_Cfg] is 1 or not.

Table 8.5-1 Virtual enabling binary input settings

No. VEBI setting Remark


0: disable
1 En_Remote_Cfg
1: enable
2 VEBI_DiffP enable pilot protection
3 VEBI_DistP enable distance protection
4 VEBI_ROC enable directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
5 VEBI_OC enable directional phase overcurrent protection
6 VEBI_Lockout enable auto-reclosing blocking

1. En_Remote_Cfg

This setting is used to determine whether the protection settings can be modified remotely via
SCADA or RTU. 1 means that settings can be remotely configured via SCADA or RTU, otherwise,
it should be set to 0.

Each VEBI setting is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service,
when this relay is energized. Through SAS or RTU, the VEBI settings can be set as 1 or 0;
and it means that the relevant protection can be in service or out of service through remote
command. It provides convenience for operation management.

These virtual binary inputs provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service
or out of service remotely away from an unattended substation.

Except for [VEBI_Lockout], logic relation between these virtual enable binary inputs mentioned in
the table and corresponding logic setting is AND. If it is set as 1, auto-reclosing will be locked out.
It should be set as 0 generally.

8.6 GOOSE VEBI Settings

The protection device configured with the GOOSE function is set with the VEBI setting used for
GOOSE sending and GOOSE receiving. It can provide up to 12 VEBI settings used for GOOSE
receiving and 12 VEBI settings used for GOOSE sending. These GOOSE VEBI settings can be
modified remotely or locally.

Table 8.6-1 GOOSE virtual enabling binary input settings

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 143


Chapter 8 Settings

No. GOOSE VEBI Range Remark


When it is allowed that the GOOSE VEBI settings
are modified remotely by SCADA, it will be set as
1 GVEBI_Remote_Cfg 0, 1
1. Otherwise, it shall be set as 0. This setting can
only be modified locally.
The protection device can configure up to 12
2 GVEBI_Recv_xx 0, 1 GOOSE VEBI settings used for GOOSE receiving.
(xx: from 00 to 11)
The protection device can configure up to 12
3 GVEBI_Send_xx 0, 1 GOOSE VEBI settings used for GOOSE sending.
(xx: from 00 to 11)

144 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface


The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via an RS232 port on the front panel. Furthermore,
remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation system via an
RS485 port. The operator is able to check the protective device status at any time.

This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator a instruction about how
to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including mean current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. In the same time, how to
change active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in
details.

9.1 Overview

The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

5
HEALTHY xx
PCS - 931
ALARM xx
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
VT ALARM xx

AR READY xx
GR
P

CH A ALARM xx
ENT
CH B ALARM xx
ESC

TRIP A xx

TRIP B xx

TRIP C xx 1 3
RECLOSE xx
4
2

Figure 9.1-1 The front panel

The function of HMI module:

No. Item Description


A 320240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim
1 LCD lighting conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed
when there is operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs (10 defined LEDs and 10
2 LED
configurable LEDs)
3 Keypad Numeric keypad and command keys for full access to the relay
DB9 RS232 port for communication with a PC for local
4 Communication port
communication

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 145


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of protection device

9.1.1 Keypad Operation

Figure 9.1-2 Keypad buttons

1. ESC:

Cancel the operation

Quit the current menu

2. ENT:

Execute the operation

Confirm the interface

3. GRP

Activate the switching interface of setting group

4. leftward and rightward direction keys ( and ):

Move the cursor horizontally

Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

5. upward and downward direction keys ( and )

Move the cursor vertically

Select command menu within the same level of menu

6. plus and minus sign keys ( and )

Modify the value

Modify and display the message number

Page up/down

9.1.2 LED Indications

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the HEALTHY LED should be on
all the time. Only with serious fault (such as chip damage, check error of setting, etc.) will the

146 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

HEALTHY LED go out and the protection device be blocked.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the ALARM LED should go out.
Only when abnormal situations except channel abnormity and VT circuit failure happen, will the
signal indicator lamp be lightened. This signal lamp goes out automatically when the abnormal
situations disappear.

After the protection device is energized, if it works normally, the VT ALARM LED shall not be on.
Only when the secondary circuit of busbar VT or line VT fails, will the VT ALARM LED be
lightened. Moreover, it will go out automatically in 10 seconds after the abnormal situations
disappear.

After the protection device is energized, the AR READY LED shall go out. Only when all the
charging conditions for automatic reclosure are met can the AR READY LED be lightened after
10s. After the reclosing is executed for one shot, the AR READY LED will go out automatically.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the CH A ALARM LED should go
out. Only when the channel A has error codes or invalid data frames, etc. will the signal indicator
lamp be lightened.

When the protection device runs normally after it is energized, the CH B ALARM LED should go
out. Only when the channel B has error codes or invalid data frames, etc. will the signal indicator
lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP A LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP B LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 147


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

After the protection device is energized, normally the TRIP C LED should go out. Only when the
protection device sends out phase A tripping signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

After the protection device is energized, normally the RECLOSE LED should go out. Only when
the protection device sends out reclosing signal will the signal lamp be lightened.

Note!

Another 10 LED indicators are programmable and user can configure them to be lit by
signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-PC software.

9.1.3 Communication Port

Figure 9.1-3 Communication ports

It is used to access the hardware of the protection device via HyperTerminal. This port is only used
to monitor the communication state by engineering debugging personnel and debug the program
by developers.

9.1.4 Communication
The MON module is comprised by embedded processor of high performance, FLASH, SRAM,
SDRAM, Ethernet controller and other peripheral equipments. It can realize the management,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording of the whole device. The MON
module uses the data of other modules in the receiver device of internal bus, and communicates
with LCD panel via RS-485 bus.

148 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

ETHERNET 1 Communication with SCADA, support IEC61850 and IEC60870-5-103 protocol


NR1102C
ETHERNET 2 Communication with SCADA, support IEC61850 and IEC60870-5-103 protocol

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

SYN+ 101 SYN+


SYN-
102 SYN-
SHLD Connect differential synchronization bus, support PPS and IRIG-B
GND 103 SHLD
RXD
TXD 104 GND
SGND
105 RXD
GND
106 TXD Connect the printer; both the receiving and sending directions of which are
stated on the basis of the device.
107 SGND
108 GND

Figure 9.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

Take NR1102C as an example, its rear view and the definition of terminals are shown as Figure
9.1-4. This module is equipped with two 100BaseT Ethernet interface, PPS/IRIG-B differential
synchronization interface and RS-232 printer interface.

The Ethernet interface can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) by
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu SETTINGSEQUIP_SETTINS, it should be ensured that the protection
device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address and subnet
mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)

PC: IP address is set as 198.87.96.102, subnet mask is set as 255.255.255.0

The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_Addr_NetA]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Subnet_Mask_A]=255.255.255.0, [En_NetA]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except
102)

9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

9.2.1 Overview
Press of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by and
. Enter the selected submenu by pressing ENT or . Press and return to the previous
menu. Press ESC and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 149


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Five latest
menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are
recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the first in first out
principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command
menus. Press to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

INTERFACE

TEST_MODE

VERSION

CLOCK

LOCAL_CTRL

SETTINGS

PRINT

REPORT

VALUES

150 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Figure 9.2-1 Menu tree

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 151


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Under the main interface, press to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing ,
and ENT. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

9.2.2 VALUES
This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current, voltage and phase
angle and the state of binary inputs (including binary inputs via opto-coupler and GOOSE binary
inputs) and alarm signals in the protection device. Besides, the communication state of optical
fibre channel and sampling channel by ECVT are also be checked. This menu fully reflects the
running environment of the protection device. As long as the displayed values consist with the
actual running situation, basically, the protection device can work normally. This menu is set to
greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


Display the measured value of current and voltage by DSP
1 CPU_METERING
module used for protection function calculation
Display the measured value of current by DSP module used
2 MON_METERING
for fault detector
3 PHASE_ANGLE Display the phase angle of current and voltage
Display the state of binary inputs which are the result of AND
4 BI_STATE
operation of GOOSE BI STATE and OPT BI STATE
5 OPT_BI_STATE Display the state of binary inputs via opto-coupler
6 GOOSE_BI_STATE Display the state of binary inputs via GOOSE
7 ALM_STATE Display the state of alarm signals
Displays the state of communication channel. Please refer to
8 COMM_CH_STATE
section 3.5.2.13
Displays the state of AC sample channel (only when ECVT is
9 SMPL_CH_STATE
adopted, this menu is useful)

9.2.3 REPORT
This menu is used to display the fault reports, self-supervision reports, binary input change reports
and control reports, so that the operator can load to view and use as the reference of analyzing
accidents and maintaining the protection device. All the reports are stored in non-volatile memory,
it can still record the reports even if it loses its power.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 TRP_REPORT Display fault reports of the protective device
2 ALM_REPORT Display self-supervision reports of the protection device
3 BI_CHG_REPORT Display binary input change reports of the protection device
4 CTRL_REPORT Display control reports of the protection device

152 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.2.4 PRINT
This menu is used for printing device description, setting, fault reports, self-supervision reports,
binary input change reports, waveform, information related with IEC60870-5-103 Protocol,
channel state and channel statistic.

This menu includes the following command menus and submenus.

No. Item Function description


1 EQUIP_DESCRON Print the description information of protection device
Print the protection device setting, including equipment
parameters, system parameters, protection settings, virtual
enabling binary input settings (VEBI settings) and GOOSE
2 SETTINGS
VEBI settings. It can print by different classifications as well as
printing all settings of the protection device. Besides, it can
also print out the latest modified setting item
3 TRP_REPORT Print the fault reports
4 ALM_REPORT Print the self-supervision reports
5 BI_CHG_REPORT Print the binary input change reports
Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel, which
6 CH_SELF_CHECK is made of some hexadecimal characters and used to
developer analyze channel state
Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel, which is
7 CH_STATISTIC
formed A.M. 9:00 every day
Print the current state of the protection device, including the
8 PRESENT_VALUES sampling value of voltage and current, the state of binary
inputs, setting and so on
9 WAVEFORM Print the recorded waveform
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),
10 PROTOCOL information serial number (INF), general classification service
group number, and channel number (ACC)
11 CANCEL_PRINT Cancel print

The submenu SETTINGS includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 EQUIP_SETTINGS Print the equipment parameters
2 EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS Print the virtual enabling binary input settings
3 GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS Print GOOSE virtual enabling binary input settings
4 SYS_SETTINGS Print the system parameters
5 PROT_SETTINGS Print the protection settings
6 ALL_SETTINGS Print all settings including equipment parameters, system

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 153


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

parameters, protection settings, VEBI settings and


GOOSE VEBI settings
7 LATEST_MODIFIED Print the setting latest modified

The submenu CH_SELF_CHECK includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel A, which is made
1 CHA of some hexadecimal characters and used to developer analyze
channel state

The submenu CH_STATISTIC includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel A, which is formed A.M.
1 CHA
9:00 every day

The submenu WAVEFORM includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


Includes branch current/voltage waveform and operation sequence
1 SMPL_WAVE
diagram of each binary inputs

9.2.5 SETTINGS
This menu is used to check the equipment parameters, system parameters, protection settings,
VEBI settings and GOOSE VEBI settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items.
Moreover, it can also execute the setting copy between different setting groups.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 EQUIP_SETTINGS Check or modify the equipment parameters
2 EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS Check or modify the virtual enabling binary input settings
Check or modify GOOSE virtual enabling binary input
3 GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS
settings
4 SYS_SETTINGS Check or modify the system parameters
5 PROT_SETTINGS Check or modify the protection settings
6 COPY_SETTINGS Copy setting between different setting groups

9.2.6 LOCAL CONTROL


This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display and binary
inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the current waveform data of the
protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS. Besides, it can send out
the request of program download, clear GOOSE reports and state statistics of optical fibre channel
and confirm time delay of sampling channel via ECVT.

154 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 TARG_RESET Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on
2 TRIG_OSCILLOG Trigger waveform recording
3 CLR_STATE Clear the state statistics of optical fibre channel
4 DOWNLOAD Send out the request of downloading program
5 CLR_GOOSE_RPT_STA Clear statistic reports of GOOSE
Confirm time delay of sampling channel (only when ECVT is
6 CONF_SMPL_CH_DLY
adopted, this menu is useful)

9.2.7 CLOCK
It is used to display and modify the current date and time of the protection device.

9.2.8 VERSION
It is used to check the information like the program version of each intelligent module in the
protection device and the program generating time.

9.2.9 TEST_MODE
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
protection device. It can be used to check module information and tripping reports item by item,
and fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to generate all kinds of reports or events
to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 BOARD_INFO Check the information about each intelligent module
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to
transmit to SCADA, including tripping reports,
2 COMM_TEST self-supervision reports and binary input change reports. It
can realize the report uploading by different classification, as
well as the uploading of all kinds of reports
3 ITEM_TRP_REPORT Check the tripping report item by item
4 TRP_REPORT Check the fault reports
5 ALM_REPORT Check the self-supervision reports
6 BI_CHG_REPORT Check the binary input change reports
7 CH_REPORT Check the state of optical fibre channel
8 GOOSE_COMM_STATE Check the communication state of GOOSE
9 GOOSE_RPT_STA Check the statistic reports of GOOSE

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 155


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.2.10 INTERFACE
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language. This menu includes the following
command menus.

No. Item Function description


1 LANGUAGE Set LCD display language

9.3 Understand the LCD Display

9.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the RESET button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both ENT and
ESC at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
Binary change reports will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display
interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the
corresponding menu.

9.3.2 Normal Status Display


After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
HEALTHY indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.

Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device

156 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the zero-sequence current sampling value, the three-phase voltage
sampling value, the zero-sequence voltage sampling value, the line voltage sampling value, line
frequency and bus frequency. if all the sampling values of the voltage and the current cant be fully
displayed within one screen, theyll be scrolling-displayed automatically from the top to the bottom.

If the device has detected any abnormal state, it will display the self-check alarm information.

9.3.3 Display Fault Report


This protection device can store 1024 times of tripping reports and 64 times of fault reports with
waveform. When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the
latest fault report, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on whether
there is self-check report at present.

For the situation that the fault report and the self-check report coexist, the upper half part is fault
report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to the upper half part, it displays separately
the record number of fault report, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format of
yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and tripping element. If there is protection element, there
is relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault phase. At the same time, if the total
lines of protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the
right. The height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection
element and tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line
in the total lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed
of one line per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection
element and tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of
the upper half part.

If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.

All the possibly displayed fault reports are shown as Table 9.3-1.

Table 9.3-1 Tripping information

No. Item Description


1 Op_Z_DPFC DPFC distance protection operating to trip
Stage 1 of DPFC percentage differential protection operating
2 Op_DPFC_Diff1
to trip
Stage 2 of DPFC percentage differential protection operating
3 Op_DPFC_Diff2
to trip
Stage 1 of steady-state percentage differential protection
4 Op_Stdy_Diff1
operating to trip
Stage 2 of steady-state percentage differential protection
5 Op_Stdy_Diff2
operating to trip
Zero-sequence percentage differential protection operating
6 Op_REF
to trip
7 Op_PhSeg_RecvTT Phase-segregated inter-tripping element operating to trip
8 Op_3P_RecvTT Accelerated inter-tripping element operating to trip

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 157


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9 Op_TT Transfer trip operating


10 Op_Z1 Zone 1 of distance protection operating to trip
11 Op_Z2 Zone 2 of distance protection operating to trip
12 Op_Z3 Zone 3 of distance protection operating to trip
13 Op_Z_SOTF Distance SOTF protection operating to trip
14 Op_Prot_PDF Protective device operating under the pole discrepancy
15 Op_ROC_SOTF Zero-sequence SOTF protection operating to trip
Stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating
16 Op_OC1
to trip
Stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating
17 Op_OC2
to trip
Stage 3 of directional phase overcurrent protection operating
18 Op_OC3
to trip
Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operating to trip local
19 Op_BFP1
circuit breaker
Stage 2 of breaker failure protection operating to trip all
20 Op_BFP2
adjacent circuit breakers connected to the same busbar
21 Op_Z_Rev Reversal distance protection operating to trip
Stage 1 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
22
Op_ROC1 operating to trip
Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
23
Op_ROC2 operating to trip
Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
24
Op_ROC3 operating to trip
Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
25
Op_ROC4 operating to trip
Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
26 Op_InvROC
operating
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating for VT
27 Op_ROC_VTS
circuit failure
28 Op_OC_VTS Phase overcurrent protection operating for VT circuit failure
29 Op_PhSelFail Three-pole tripping for failure in fault phase selection
30 Op_1PTrpFail Three-pole tripping for failure in single-pole tripping
31 Op_Persist1P Three-pole tripping for single-phase operation
32 Op_AR Auto-reclosing operating
33 Op_FD Fault detector of the protection device operating
Sample data of DSP module (slot 2) is abnormal and
34 Alm_Oscillog_CPU
triggering waveform recording
Sample data of DSP module (slot 3) is abnormal and
35 Alm_Oscillog_MON
triggering waveform recording
Recording waveform initiated through menu
36 Op_ManTrigOscillog
TRIG_OSCILLO
37 BI_TrigOscillog Recording waveform initiated through binary input

158 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

[BI_TrigOscillo]
38 BO_Fail_AR Auto-reclosing is failure

9.3.4 Display Self-supervision Report


This protection device can store self-supervision reports for 1024 times. During the running of
protection device, the self-supervision report of hardware self-check errors or system running
abnormity will be displayed immediately.

All the possibly displayed alarm messages are shown as Table 9.3-2.

Table 9.3-2 Self-supervision information

No. Item Description


1 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU Sample data of DSP module (slot 2) is abnormal
2 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON Sample data of DSP module (slot 3) is abnormal
3 Alm_Setting Invalid settings in active setting group
4 Alm_DSP_CPU DSP check of DSP module (slot 2) is error
5 Alm_DSP_MON DSP check of DSP module (slot 3) is error
Zero-sequence overcurrent element operates for
6 Alm_PersistI0
greater than 10s
General fault detector element operates for greater
7 Alm_PersistFD
than 10s
8 Alm_VTS Busbar VT circuit failure
9 Alm_VTS_Ux Line VT circuit failure
10 Alm_CTS CT circuit failure
Binary input [BI_52b_Pha], [BI_52b_Phb] and
11 Alm_52b
[BI_52b_Phc] are abnormal
12 Alm_TrpOut The control chips of binary output circuit is damaged
13 Alm_Pwr_Opto Loss of opto-coupler power supply
Binary input [BI_TrpA_Other], [BI_TrpB_Other],
14 Alm_ExTrp_BI [BI_TrpC_Other], [BI_Trp3P_Line] or [BI_Trp3P_G/T]
is abnormal
15 Alm_ID_ChA ID received is wrong from channel A
16 Alm_ChA The communication channel A is abnormal
17 Alm_NoValidFram_ChA No valid data frame is received from channel A
18 Alm_CRC_ChA CRC check of data frame from channel A fails
19 Alm_Connect_ChA The connection of optical fibre channel A is wrong
The current differential protection of channel A is
20 Alm_OutDiffP_ChA
disabled
21 Alm_Diff_ChA The differential current of channel A is abnormal
22 Alm_CompParam_ChA The compensation parameter of channel A is wrong
23 Alm_TT The receiving or sending transfer trip is abnormal
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is an error in
24 Alm_EquipConfig
the GOOSE configuration file (i.e. GOOSE.txt).
25 Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope Setting value is out of setting scope.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 159


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in


26 Alm_BoardConfig modules and the designing drawing of an
applied-specific project
27 Alm_SynChkFail_AR Synchronism check of AR fails
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network
28 GAlm_NetStorm_NetA
storm occurring on the network A.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network
29 GAlm_NetStorm_NetB
storm occurring on the network B.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A is
30 GAlm_Disc_NetA
disconnected.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B is
31 GAlm_Disc_NetB
disconnected.
The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the
32 GAlm_CfgUnmatch
GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A for
33 GAlm_NetA_GOOSExx
GOOSExx is disconnected. (xx: from 00 to 11)
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B for
34 GAlm_NetB_GOOSExx
GOOSExx is disconnected. (xx: from 00 to 11)
The GOOSE control blocks received on network and the
35 GAlm_CfgUnmatch_GOOSExx GOOSE control blocks in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched.
(xx: from 00 to 11)
36 BO_BlkAR Blocking auto-reclosing
37 BO_Inprog_AR Initiating auto-reclosing
38 BO_Lockout Blocking auto-reclosing

9.3.5 Display Binary Input Change Report


This protection device can store 1024 times of binary input change reports. During the running of
the protection device, the binary input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from 0 to
1 or from 1 to 0.

All the possibly displayed binary inputs are shown as Table 9.3-3, Table 9.3-4 and Table 9.3-5.

Table 9.3-3 Binary input signals

No. Item Description


1 EBI_DiffP The binary input of enabling/disabling differential protection
2 EBI_DistP The binary input of enabling/disabling distance protection
The binary input of enabling/disabling directional
3 EBI_ROC
zeros-sequence overcurrent protection
The binary input of enabling/disabling directional phase
4 EBI_OC
overcurrent protection
The binary input of enabling/disabling of zone 1 of distance
5 EBI_Z1
protection
6 EBI_Opt1_AR The binary input of option 1 of AR mode
7 EBI_Opt2_AR The binary input of option 2 of AR mode

160 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

8 EBI_Lockout The binary input of lockout auto-reclosing


9 BI_Opt1_ActiveGrp The binary input of switching active setting group
10 BI_Opt2_ActiveGrp The binary input of switching active setting group
BI_TrpA_Other The binary input of phase A tripping from other protection
11
device
BI_TrpB_Other The binary input of phase B tripping from other protection
12
device
BI_TrpC_Other The binary input of phase C tripping from other protection
13
device
14 BI_3PTrp_Line The binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection
The binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or
15 BI_3PTrp_G/T
transformer protection
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase A circuit
16 BI_52b_Pha
breaker
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase B circuit
17 BI_52b_Phb
breaker
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase C circuit
18 BI_52b_Phc
breaker
19 BI_LowPres_AR The binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing
20 BI_TrigOscillog The binary input of initiating recording waveform manually
21 BI_MCB_VT_Line The binary input of line VT is out of service
22 BI_MCB_VT_Bus The binary input of busbar VT is out of service
23 BI_Send_TT The binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end
24 BI_Send1_TS The binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end
25 BI_Send2_TS The binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer trip from remote
26 VBI_RecvTT_ChA
end via optical fibre channel A
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 1 from
27 VBI_RecvTS1_ChA
remote end via optical fibre channel A
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 2 from
28 VBI_RecvTS2_ChA
remote end via optical fibre channel A
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer trip from remote
29 VBI_RecvTT
end via optical fibre channel
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 1 from
30 VBI_RecvTS1
remote end via optical fibre channel
The virtual binary input of receiving transfer signal 2 from
31 VBI_RecvTS2
remote end via optical fibre channel
The virtual binary input of indicating the state of differential
32 VBI_DiffP_Rmt
protection on remote end via optical fibre channel
33 VEBI_DiffP The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling differential protection
34 VEBI_DistP The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling distance protection
The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling directional
35 VEBI_ROC
zero-sequence overcurrent protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 161


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

36 VEBI_Lockout The VEBI setting of lockout auto-reclosing


The VEBI setting of enabling/disabling directional phase
37 VEBI_OC
overcurrent protection
The binary input of receiving pulse signal for time
38 BI_Pulse_GPS
synchronization from GPS
39 BI_Print The binary input of triggering printing report
The binary input of blocking communication between
40 BI_BlkComm
equipment with the SAS system
The binary input of initiating reset of latching signal and LCD
41 BI_RstTarg
displaying

Note!

For binary signals [BI_Pulse_GPS], [BI_Print], [BI_BlkComm] and [BI_RstTarg], they are
not logged in the event recorder and only are viewed on the LCD through menu BI
STATE

Table 9.3-4 Binary input signals via opto-coupler

No. Item Description


1 EBI_Lockout_OPT The binary input of lockout auto-reclosing via opto-coupler
The binary input of phase A tripping from other protection
2 BI_TrpA_Other_OPT
device via opto-coupler
The binary input of phase B tripping from other protection
3 BI_TrpB_Other_OPT
device via opto-coupler
The binary input of phase C tripping from other protection
4 BI_TrpC_Other_OPT
device via opto-coupler
The binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection via
5 BI_3PTrp_Line_OPT
opto-coupler
The binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or
6 BI_3PTrp_G/T_OPT
transformer protection via opto-coupler
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase A circuit
7 BI_52b_PhA_OPT
breaker via opto-coupler
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase B circuit
8 BI_52b_PhB_OPT
breaker via opto-coupler
The binary input of normally closed contact of phase C circuit
9 BI_52b_PhC_OPT
breaker via opto-coupler
The binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing via
10 BI_LowPres_AR_OPT
opto-coupler
The binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end via
11 BI_Send_TT_OPT
opto-coupler
The binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end via
12 BI_Send1_TS_OPT
opto-coupler
The binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end via
13 BI_Send2_TS_OPT
opto-coupler

162 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

14 BI_Sparexx_OPT Reversed binary input via opto-coupler (xx: from 00 to 09)

Table 9.3-5 GOOSE binary input signals

No. Item Description


1 GBI_Lockout1
2 GBI_Lockout2
3 GBI_Lockout3 GOOSE binary input of blocking AR
4 GBI_Lockout4
5 GBI_Lockout5
GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection
6 GBI_TrpA_Other
device
GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection
7 GBI_TrpB_Other
device
GOOSE binary input of phase B tripping from other protection
8 GBI_TrpC_Other
device
9 GBI_3PTrp_Line GOOSE binary input of three-phase tripping from line protection
10 GBI_3PTrp_G/T1
11 GBI_3PTrp_G/T2
GOOSE binary input of three-phase tripping from generator or
12 GBI_3PTrp_G/T3
transformer protection
13 GBI_3PTrp_G/T4
14 GBI_3PTrp_G/T5
GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase A
15 GBI_52b_PhA
circuit breaker
GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase B
16 GBI_52b_PhB
circuit breaker
GOOSE binary input of normally closed contact of phase C
17 GBI_52b_PhC
circuit breaker
18 GBI_LowPres_AR GOOSE binary input of low pressure to block auto-reclosing
19 GBI_Send_TT1
20 GBI_Send_TT2 GOOSE binary input of sending transfer trip to remote end via
21 GBI_Send_TT3 opto-coupler
22 GBI_Send_TT4
23 GBI_Send1_TS1
24 GBI_Send1_TS2 GOOSE binary input of sending transfer signal 1 to remote end
25 GBI_Send1_TS3 via opto-coupler
26 GBI_Send1_TS4
27 GBI_Send2_TS1
28 GBI_Send2_TS2 GOOSE binary input of sending transfer signal 2 to remote end
29 GBI_Send2_TS3 via opto-coupler
30 GBI_Send2_TS4
GOOSE virtual enabling binary input setting of receiving
31 GVEBI_Recv_xx
function (xx: from 00 to 11)
32 GVEBI_Send_xx GOOSE virtual enabling binary input setting of sending function

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 163


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

(xx: from 00 to 11)

9.3.6 Display Control Report


This protection device can store the control report for 1024 times. During the running of the
protection device, the control report will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.

All the possibly displayed control reports are shown as Table 9.3-6.

Table 9.3-6 Control reports

No. Item Description


1 Reboot The protective equipment has been reboot.
2 Reset_Target The protective equipment has been reset.
3 Settings_Chg The settings of protective equipment have been changed.
4 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
5 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted.
6 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
7 SubProcess_Exit Subprocess has exited.

9.4 Keypad Operation

9.4.1 View Device Status


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the VALUES menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

4. Press the or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);

5. Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

6. Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the VALUES menu);

9.4.2 View Device Report


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the REPORT menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

164 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

4. Press the or to page up/down;

5. Press the or to select pervious or next record;

6. Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the REPORT menu);

For the fault report, view the single item tripping report by the command menu
ITEM_TRP_REPORT, and the item tripping report produces with change of any item of fault
report. The item tripping reports can save for 1024 times at most.

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu ITEM_TRP_REPORT,


and then press the ENT to enter the menu;

4. Press the or to select pervious or next record;

5. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the TEST_MODE menu).

9.4.3 View Module Information


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu BOARD_INFO, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu;

4. Press the or to move the scroll bar;

5. Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the TEST_MODE menu).

9.4.4 Print Device Report


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the PRINT menu, and then press the ENT
or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

Selecting the TRP_REPORT, and then

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 165


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT). If
the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will
display Printer Busy. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT).

Selecting the command menu ALM_REPORT or BI_CHG_REPORT, and then

Press the or to move the cursor. Press the or to select the starting and ending
numbers of printing message. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing..., and
then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT). Press the ESC to exit this
menu (returning to the menu PRINT).

4. If selecting the command menu PROTOCOL, PRESENT_VALUES or


EQUIP_DESCRON, press the ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing..., and then
automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu PRINT);

5. If selecting the WAVEFORM or SETTINGS, press the ENT or to enter the next
level of menu;

6. After entering the submenu SETTINGS, press or to move the cursor, and then
press the ENT to print the corresponding default value. If selecting the
PROT_SETTINGS or ALL_SETTINGS:

Press the or to select the setting zone to be printed. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
SETTINGS). Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).

7. After entering the submenu WAVEFORM, press the ENT to enter the SMPL_WAVE.
Without waveform data, the LCD will display No Wave Form Data! (Before executing
the command menu SMPL_WAVE, it is necessary to execute the command menu
TRIG_OSCILLOG in the menu LOCAL_CTRL, otherwise the LCD will display No
Waveform Data!). With waveform data existing:

Press the or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the ENT, the LCD will
display Start Printing..., and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
WAVEFORM). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and
the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
WAVEFORM).

9.4.5 View Device Setting


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

166 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

4. Press the or to move the cursor;

5. Press the + or - to page up/down;

6. Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).

Note!

If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press
the ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
ENT to enter the menu;

4. Press the or to move the cursor;

5. Press the + or - to page up/down;

6. Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS );

8. If selecting the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the setting
item to be modified, and then press the ENT;

Press the or to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the or
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the or to modify the value), press the
ESC to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS. Press the ENT to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS).

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the , or ESC, and the LCD will display Save or Not?. Directly press the ESC or
press the or to move the cursor. Select the Cancel, and then press the ENT to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS).

Press the or to move the cursor. Select No and press the ENT, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).

Press the or to move the cursor to select Yes, and then press the ENT, the LCD will

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 167


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

display password input interface.

Password:

Input a 4-bit password (, , or ). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,


and then press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS. If the password is correct, LCD will display Save
Settings, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
EQUIP_SETTINGS), with all modified setting items as modified values.

Note!

For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.

9. If selecting the command menu EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS or


GOOSE_VEBI_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the ENT;

10. If selecting the command menu EQUIP_SETTINGS, move the cursor to the default
item to be modified, press the ENT

Note!

After modifying the parameter settings of the device, the HEALTHY indicator lamp of the
protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check does not pass, the protection device will be
blocked.

11. If selecting the command menu PROT_SETTING, the LCD will display the following
interface:

168 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

5. PROT_SETTINGS

Please Select Group for Config

Active Group: 01

Selected Group: 02

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ENT to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the ENT to enter.

Note!

After modifying the equipment parameter of the device, the HEALTHY indicator lamp of
the protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check does not pass, the protection device will be
blocked.

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the SETTINGS menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu COPY_SETTINGS,


and then press the ENT to enter the menu.

Press the or to modify the value. Press the ESC, and return to the menu SETTINGS.
Press the ENT, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
SETTINGS. If the password is correct, the LCD will display Copy Settings Success!, and exit
this menu (returning to the menu SETTINGS).

9.4.8 Switch Setting Group


The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the GRP

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 169


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the ENT, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the ESC to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the HEALTHY indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check does not pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.

9.4.9 Delete Device Message


The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the , , , and ENT; Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to
the original state). Press the ENT to carry out the deletion.

Note!

The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including fault report, self-supervision report and binary input change report.
Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of the function
shall be cautious.

9.4.10 Modify Device Clock


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the CLOCK menu, and then press the
ENT to enter clock display

3. Press the or to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;

4. Press the + or - to modify value, and then press the ENT to save the modification
and return to the main menu;

5. Press the ESC to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

9.4.11 Check Software Version


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the VERSION menu, and then press the
ENT to display the software version;

3. Press the ESC to return to the main menu.

170 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.4.12 Communication Test


The operation is as follows:

1. Press the to enter the main menu;

2. Press the or to move the cursor to the TEST_MODE menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3. Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu COMM_TEST, and
then press the ENT to enter the menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Entering
Communication Test;

4. Press the or to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu All
Test, Trip Test, Alarm Test and BI Test.

Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication test and return to the
TEST_MODE menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Communication Test Timeout
and Exiting.

5. If selecting the All Test, press the ENT, and the device will successively carry out the
Trip Test, Alarm Test and BI Test.

6. If selecting the Trip Test, Alarm Test or BI Test, press the ENT.

7. Press the + or - to page up/down, and then press the or to move the scroll bar.
(taking the Trip Test as an example):

Move the cursor to select the corresponding protection elements. Press the ENT to execute the
communication test one by one, the SAS will receive the corresponding fault report, and view the
fault report produced by communication test in the command menu ITEM_TRP_REPORT.

Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the TEST_MODE menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Communication
Test Timeout and Exiting.

If selecting the Alarm Test or BI Test, not only the SAS can receive the corresponding
self-check report or binary signals, but also the self-check report or binary signals
produced by communication test can be respectively viewed by the two command menus
of ALM_REPORT and BI_CHG_REPORT in the menu REPORT.

8. Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu TEST_MODE, at this moment,
the LCD will display Communication Test Exiting.

Note!

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 171


Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

The LCD interface provided in this chapter is a mere reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual protection device may be
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

172 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

Chapter 10 Communications

10.1 General Description

This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the submenu EQUIP_SETTINGS.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface


This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.

10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the products connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

10.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120 (Ohm) Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 173


Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.

Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.

This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the products chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

10.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.

Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.

Note!

174 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

It is extremely important that the 120 termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NARI-RELAYS cannot assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.

Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface


This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu
EQUIP_SETTINGS.

10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 175


Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication


The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.

To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings to the protective
device must be configured.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NARI-RELAYS.

The protective device conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General commands

Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer


Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.

The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.

The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.

176 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

10.3.3 Time Synchronization


The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.

If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events


Events are categorized using the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

All spontaneous events can be gained by printing, implementing submenu PROTOCOL in the
menu PRINT.

10.3.5 General Interrogation


The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.

Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.6 General Service


The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the
protective device, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and
ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

All general classification service group numbers can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
PROTOCOL in the menu PRINT.

Note!

If the setting [En_Remote_Cfg] in the submenu EQUIP_VEBI_SETTINGS is set as 0,


to modify protection settings remotely will not be allowed. Moreover, equipment
parameters are not allowed to be modified remotely whether the item [En_Remote_Cfg] is
1 or 0.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 177


Chapter 10 Communications

10.3.7 Disturbance Records


This protective device can store up to eight disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.

All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
PROTOCOL in the menu PRINT.

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. It is properly developed by NARI-RELAYS too. All the service of this relay is based on
generic functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay.
And this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after
establishing a successful communication link.

Group Number Group Caption Description


0 Device Description
1 Device Parameter
2 Setting Group
3 Setting
6 Virtual Enabling BI
9 Measurement
10 Fault Data
11 Net Setting
12 Enabling BI
13 Operation Element
14 Alarm Info
15 Disturbance Info List

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

178 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations


related to IEDs

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Principles and models

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Common data classes

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
Compatible logical node classes and data classes

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.5.2 Communication profiles


The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the submenu EQUIP_SETTINGS.

1. MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.

2. Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 179


Chapter 10 Communications

3. Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation


equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.

4. Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IEC
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

10.5.3 Server data organization


IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.

Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information
about the IED logical device.

10.5.3.1 Digital status values

The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.

10.5.3.2 Analog values

Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides

180 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10.5.3.3 Protection logical nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-900 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

PDIF: current differential and transfer trip

PDIS: phase-to-phase distance, phase-to-ground distance and SOTF distance

PTUC: undercurrent

PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent and overcurrent when CTS

PTUV: undervoltage

PTUF: underfrequency

PTOV: overvoltage and auxiliary overvoltage

PSCH: Protection scheme

RREC: automatic reclosing

RSYN: Synchronism-check

RFLO: Fault locator

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags PTRC.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PTOC1 is PTOC1.ST.Op.general. For the
PCS-900 series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 181


Chapter 10 Communications

the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.

10.5.3.4 LLN0 and other logical nodes

Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:

LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the operate outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of operate outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new operate of PTRC.

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the
trigger mode.

10.5.4 Server features and configuration


10.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered reporting

IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

Bit 1: Data-change

Bit 4: Integrity

Bit 5: General interrogation

OptFlds: Option Fields.

182 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

Bit 1: Sequence-number

Bit 2: Report-time-stamp

Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion

Bit 4: Data-set-name

Bit 5: Data-reference

Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)

Bit 8: Conf-revision

Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

10.5.4.2 File transfer

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.

10.5.4.3 Timestamps

The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.

10.5.4.4 Logical node name prefixes

IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.

10.5.4.5 GOOSE services

IEC61850 specifies the type of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 183


Chapter 10 Communications

VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also Devices that transmit GOOSE messages
also function as servers. Each GOOSE publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure
and control the transmission.

The transmission is also controlled via device setting GOOSE Group ID in the setting submenu
EQUIP SETUP. The GOOSE Group ID setting item defines a definite IED group in which the
IED can communicate with each other via GOOSE protocol, and if GOOSE Group ID is configured
to 0, GOOSE service is blocked in this IED. IEC61850 recommends a default priority value of 4
for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More
details are specified in IEC61850 part 8-1. IEC61850 recommends that the Ether-type Application
ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source.

The PCS-931 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.

IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

The general steps required for transmission configuration are:

1. Configure the transmission data

2. Configure the transmission dataset

3. Configure the GOOSE service settings

The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1. Configure the GOOSE service settings

2. Configure the reception data

10.5.5 ACSI Conformance


10.5.5.1 ACSI basic conformance statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series


Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

184 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

B31 Publisher side O Y


B32 Subscriber side O Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side O N
B42 Subscriber side O N

Where:

C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O: Optional

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.2 ACSI models conformance statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series


M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 185


Chapter 10 Communications

Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y

Where:

C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared

C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared

C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.3 ACSI Services conformance statement

Service Server/Publisher PCS-900 Series


Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y

186 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 187


Chapter 10 Communications

S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y

10.5.6 Logical Nodes


10.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table

The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.

Nodes PCS-900 Series


L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential YES
PDIR: Direction comparison
PDIS: Distance YES
PDOP: Directional overpower
PDUP: Directional underpower
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency
PHAR: Harmonic restraint
PHIZ: Ground detector
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision
POPF: Over power factor
PPAM: Phase angle measuring
PSCH: Protection scheme YES

188 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault


PTEF: Transient earth fault
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency
PTOV: Overvoltage YES
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload
PTUC: Undercurrent
PTUV: Undervoltage YES
PUPF: Underpower factor
PTUF: Underfrequency
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent
PVPH: Volts per Hz
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary
RDRS: Disturbance record handling
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking YES
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling
CCGR: Cooling group control
CILO: Interlocking
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching
CSWI: Switch controller
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving
IHMI: Human machine interface
ITCI: Telecontrol interface
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 189


Chapter 10 Communications

ARCO: Reactive power control


ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller
AVCO: Voltage control
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements YES
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic
MMTR: Metering
MMXN: Non phase related measurement
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance
MSTA: Metering statistics
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)
YLTC: Tap changer
YPSH: Power shunt
YPTR: Power transformer
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network
ZBAT: Battery
ZBSH: Bushing
ZCAB: Power cable
ZCAP: Capacitor bank
ZCON: Converter
ZGEN: Generator
ZGIL: Gas insulated line
ZLIN: Power overhead line
ZMOT: Motor
ZREA: Reactor
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component
ZSAR: Surge arrestor
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

190 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Communications

10.6 GOOSE Service

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction


The General Object oriented substation event (GOOSE) defined in IEC61850 standard is based
on the fast Ethernet multi-broadcasting message transmission, taking place of the hard-wired
communication mode between classic intelligent electronic device (IED) and providing a fast,
efficient and reliable method for communication among logic nodes.

The GOOSE service supports the exchange of public data comprised of data sets, it is used to
protect the data transmission which requires high real-time like tripping, breaker position and
interlocked information. The information exchange of GOOSE service is based on the
publish/subscribe mechanism, and any IED device in the same GOOSE network can be
conducted as subscription terminal to receive data and as publication terminal to provide
data to other IED device as well, so that the increasing or modification of communication data
between IED devices can be realized in a much easier way.

10.6.2 GOOSE Function


The PCS-931 series devices use independent high efficient DSP board to realize GOOSE, so it
has super-high real-time property and reliability. Two 100M FDX optical fiber Ethernet interfaces
on the DSP board can be corresponded to different VLAN networks. The GOOSE dual-networks
configuration improves the reliability and stability of system.

1. GOOSE receiving/sending mechanism

In order to ensure the real-time property and reliability of GOOSE service, GOOSE message
adopts ASN.1 code which relates to basic encoding rule (BER) and transmit data directly in
Ethernet link layer without passing through TCP/IP protocol and also adopts special
receiving/sending mechanism.

Sending of the GOOSE message adopts heartbeat message and position-altering message fast
resending combination mechanism. If the data in GOOSE data sets is not changed, the heartbeat
message whose interval is T0 will be sent, the status number (stnum) in message will not be
changed and the sequence number (sqnum) will be increased progressively. If the data in GOOSE
data set is changed, after sending a frame of position-altering message, the position-altering
message will be fast resent in the interval of T0, T1, T2, and T3. The status number (stnum) in the
message whose data is position-altered will be increased, and the sequence number (sqnum) will
be started from zero.

The GOOSE receiving can detect link interrupt according to the TATL (Time Allow to Live) in the
GOOSE message. The GOOSE data receiving mechanism can be divided into single frame
receiving and dual-frames receiving. The intelligent operation box uses dual-frames receiving
mechanism and update data after receiving two frames of messages with the same GOOSE data.
Other protection and monitoring devices use single frame receiving mechanism and update data
immediately after receiving position-altering message (stnum changed). If the status number
(stnum) in the received message is not changed, dual-frames message confirmation will be used
to update data.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 191


Chapter 10 Communications

2. GOOSE Alarm

GOOSE will alarm the abnormal conditions produced during receiving/sending process, the
GOOSE alarms mainly include: GOOSE network A/B network link breaking alarm, GOOSE
configuration inconformity alarm and GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm.

The GOOSE network A/B link breaking alarm is: this alarm will be produced when correct GOOSE
message is not received in 2 times of the TATL (Time Allow to Live).

The GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm is: the attribute of GOOSE control block of GOOSE
publisher and subscriber like configuration version number must be identical. Otherwise this
GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm will be produced.

The GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm is: when network-storm is produced in GOOSE
network, if data flow of network port is beyond normal range and abnormal message is produced,
this GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm will be produced.

3. GOOSE Service

When service status of the device is set to 1, the GOOSE message sent by the device has a Test
Flag and receiving terminal can obtain service status of sending terminal by the test flag of
message. When the service status of sending terminal conforms to that of receiving terminal, the
device will carry out normal processing to the received GOOSE data. When the service status of
sending terminal doesnt conform to that of receiving terminal, the device will process the received
GOOSE data accordingly to ensure that the serviced device will not influence the normal running
of device, improving the flexibility and reliability of GOOSE service.

192 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.1 Introduction

The chapter contains instructions on how to install and commission the protective device. It can
also be used as a reference if a periodic test is performed. The chapter covers procedures for
mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing a directionality test.

The chapter contains the following information:

1. The Safety information presents warning and note signs, which the user should draw
attention to.

2. The Overview gives an overview over the major task when installing and commissioning the
protection equipment.

3. The Unpacking and checking the protective device contains instructions on how to
receive the protection equipment.

4. The Installing the protective device contains instructions on how to install the protection
equipment.

5. The Checking the external circuit contains instructions on how to check that the protection
equipment is properly connected to the protection system.

6. The Energizing the protective device contains instructions on how to start-up the
protection equipment.

7. The Setting the protective device contains instructions on how to download settings and
configuration to the protection equipment.

8. The Establishing connection and verifying communication contains instructions on how


to verify the communication.

9. The Verifying settings by secondary injection contains instructions on how to verify that
each included function operates correctly according to the set value.

The chapter is addressing the installation, commissioning and maintenance personnel responsible
for taking the protection into normal service and out of service. The installation personnel must
have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment. The commissioning and maintenance
personnel must be well experienced in using protection equipment, test equipment, protection
functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.

11.2 Safety Information

This section contains safety information. Warning signs are presented which attend the user to be

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 193


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

careful during certain operations in order to avoid human injuries or damage to equipment.

Warning signs

Warning!

Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations. Working in a high voltage
environment requires serious approach to avoid human injuries and damage to
equipment.

Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

Always avoid touching the circuitry when the cover is removed. The product contains
electronic circuitries which can be damaged if exposed to static electricity (ESD). The
electronic circuitries also contain high voltage which is lethal to humans.

Always use suitable isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.

Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a protection equipment


during normal operation. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal.
Operation may be disrupted and protection equipment and measuring circuitry may be
damaged.

Always connect the protection equipment to protective ground, regardless of the


operating conditions. This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing,
demonstrations and off-site configuration. Operating the protection equipment without
proper grounding may damage both terminal and measuring circuitry, and may cause
injuries in case of an accident.

Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without


short-circuiting the transformers secondary winding. Operating a current transformer
with the secondary winding open will cause a massive potential build-up that may
damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

Never unmount the front or back cover from a powered equipment or from a protection
equipment connected to powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

Caution signs

Caution!

Always transport modules using certified conductive bags. Always handle modules using
a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground and on a suitable antistatic
surface. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may cause damage to the module.

Do not connect live wires to the protection equipment. Internal circuitry may be damaged.

194 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground when replacing
modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and protection
equipment circuitry.

Take care to avoid electrical shock if accessing wiring and connection protection
equipment when installing and commissioning.

Note signs

Note!

Changing the active setting group will inevitably change the protection equipments
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the change.

The protection assembly is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times
rated value.

Activating the other setting group without proper configuration may seriously affect the
protection equipments operation.

11.3 Overview

The settings for each function must be calculated before the commissioning task can start. A
configuration, made in the configuration and programming tool, must also be available if the
protection equipment does not have a factory configuration downloaded.

The protection equipment is unpacked and visually checked. It is preferably mounted in a cubicle.
The connection to the protection system has to be checked in order to verify that the installation
was successful.

The installation and commissioning task starts with configuring the digital communication modules,
if included. The protection equipment can then be configured and set, which means that settings
and a configuration has to be applied if the protection equipment does not have a factory
configuration downloaded. Then the operation of each included function according to applied
settings has to be verified by secondary injection. A complete check of the configuration can then
be made. A conformity test of the secondary system has also to be done. When the primary
system has been energized a directionality check should be made.

11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment

Procedure as below:

1. Remove the transport casing.

2. Visually inspect the protection equipment.

1) Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 195


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

2) The rating information should be given for the protection equipment.

3) The rating information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.

Panel wiring

Check the conducting wire used in the panel to assure that their cross section meet the
requirement. Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label

Check all the isolator links, terminal blocks, ferrules, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Equipment plug-in modules

Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator links and push button

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator links and push buttons work normally
and smoothly.

3. Check that all items are included in accordance with the delivery documents

The user is requested to check that all software functions are included according to the delivery
documents after the terminal has been energized.

4. Check for transport damages

These product checks cover all aspects of the protection, which should be checked to ensure that
the protection not only has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning but also functions
correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.

11.5 Installing The Protective Device

11.5.1 Overview
The mechanical and electrical environmental conditions at the installation site must be within
permissible range according to the technical data of the protection equipment. Dusty, damp places,
places liable to rapid temperature variations, powerful vibrations and shocks, surge voltages of
high amplitude and fast rise time, strong induced magnetic fields or similar extreme conditions
should be avoided. Please refer to Chapter 1 for details.

Sufficient space must be available in front of and at rear of the protection panel to allow access for

196 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

maintenance and future modifications. Flush mounted protection equipment should be mounted
so that equipment modules can be added and replaced without excessive demounting.

11.5.2 Dimensions
The equipment adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-931 series is IEC
4U high and 19 wide. Figure 11.5-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.5-2 shows the panel
cut-out.
101.6
177.0

Figure 11.5-1 Dimensions of PCS-931

465.0

4-6.8

450.0

Figure 11.5-2 panel cut-out of PCS-931

11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines


Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.

All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus. On the other hand,
electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 197


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

Note!

All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding


The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.

Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.

Note!

If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.

Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (refer to Figure 11.5-3).

The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.

Note!

For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials according
to the electrochemical code.

The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).

198 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 11.5-3 Cubicle grounding system

11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device


There is a ground terminal on the rear panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4), and the ground braided
copper strip can be connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as
possible. The main thing is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from
unit to unit are not allowed.

There are some ground terminals on some connectors of the relays, and the sign is GND. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Figure 11.5-4 Ground terminal

11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation


High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.

The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.

Data of braided copper strip: threaded M4, 4.0mm2. Proper terminations must be fitted to both
ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting them firmly to the items to be connected.

The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.

The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 199


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 11.5-5 Ground strip and termination

11.5.7 Making the electrical connections


Always make sure established guidelines for this type of terminal is followed during installation.
When necessary use screened twisted-pair cables to minimize susceptibility. Otherwise, use any
kind of regular non-screened tinned RK cable or equivalent.

When using screened cabling always use 360 full screen cable bushing to ensure screen
coupling. Ensure that all signals of the single circuit are in the same single cable. Avoid mixing
current and voltage measuring signals in the same cable. Also use separate cables for control and
measuring circuits.

1. Connecting the VT/CT circuits:

Heavy-duty terminal block, M4 threaded terminal ends. VT circuit must be connected with the
protective device through an MCB.

2. Connecting the auxiliary power:

Auxiliary power cords cross can be directly screwed fixed on the rear panel of DC board. Refer to
section 6.3.12.

3. Input/output signal connectors:

Welding terminals. Those devices are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections
to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two
ring terminals per relay terminal.

To meet the insulation requirements of the terminal block, for the sake of safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.

The wire used for all connections to the welding terminal blocks and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the EIA RS-485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.

It is recommended that the auxiliary power circuit wiring should be protected by using a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits
must never be open.

4. Connecting to protective ground:

Connect the unit to the grounding bar of the cubicle with green/yellow conductor; connected to the
protective Earthing terminal at the back of the DC board. Refer to section 6.3.12. Attend that the
earth wire must be as short as possible. All cautions have to be taken to ensure the best electrical

200 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

conductivity, particularly the contact quality, stainless conductor. The impedance between the relay
Earthing terminal and the Earth must be less than 20m under 12Volt, 50Hz. What matters is that
the device has to be only grounded at one point. Loop grounding from unit to unit is not allowed.

5. Installing the optic fibres

Connectors are generally color coded; connect blue or dark grey cable connectors to blue or dark
grey (receive) back-side connectors. Connect black or grey cable connectors to black or grey
(transmit) back-side connectors.

Fiber optical cables are sensitive to handling. Do not bend too sharply. The minimum curvature
radius is 15 cm for plastic fibers and 25 cm for glass fibers. If cable straps are used, apply with
loose fit.

Note!

Always hold the connector, never the cable, when connecting or disconnecting optical
fibres. Do not twist, pull or bend the fibre. Invisible damage may increase fibre damping
thus making communication impossible.

6. Installing the RS-485 serial port communication cables

When using galvanic connection between protective relay and communication equipment or
point-to-point galvanic connection between two protective relays it is essential that the cable
installation is carefully done. This is true regardless of type of module used, only the possible
length of the cable differs. The factors that must be taken into account is the susceptibility for noise
disturbance, due to that the levels of the communication signal are very low. For a best result, a
cable with twisted pairs with screen should be used.

RS485 serial communication interface, a termination 120-ohm resistor has to be connected at


each extremity of the bus. Refer to Chapter 10.

11.6 Check the External Circuit

The user must check the installation, which includes verifying that the relay is connected to the
other parts of the protection system. This is done with the relay and all connected circuits
de-energized.

1. Checking the VT/CT circuits

Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied wiring diagram.

Test the circuitry. The following tests are recommended:

1) Polarity check

2) CT circuit current measurement (primary injection test)

3) Grounding check

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 201


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

The polarity check verifies the integrity of the circuits and the phase relationship. The check should
be performed as close as possible to the relay. The primary injection test verifies the CT ration and
the wiring all the way through from the primary system to the relay. Injection must be performed for
each phase-to-neutral circuit and each phase-to-phase pair. In each case currents in all phases
and the neutral line are measured.

2. Checking the power supply

Check that the value of the auxiliary supply voltage remains with the permissible range under all
operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct according to the instruction manual on the
rear plate of DC board.

3. Checking binary input circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary input connector form the binary input cards. Check all connected
signals so that both input level and polarity are in accordance with the relays specifications.

Note!

The binary inputs may be energized from an external dc auxiliary supply (e.g. the station
battery) in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field
voltage otherwise damage to the protection may result. The status of each binary input can
be viewed using either tool software installed in a portable PC or by checking the front
man-machine interface LCD. When each binary input is energized the display will change
to indicate the new state of the inputs.

4. Checking binary output circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary output connector form the binary output cards. Check all
connected signals so that both load and polarity are in accordance with the relays specifications.

11.7 Energizing The Protective Device

Before the procedures in this section can be carried out the connection to external circuitry must
have been checked which ensures that the installation was made correctly.

The user must energize the power supply to the relay to start it up. This could be done in a
numerous of ways, from energizing a whole cubicle to energizing a single relay. The user should
reconfigure the relay settings. The relay time must be set. The self-supervision function should
also be checked to verify that the relay unit operates properly. The user could also check the
software version, the relays serial number, the installed modules, and their ordering number to
ensure that the relay is according to delivery and ordering specifications.

1. Checking front panel LCD display

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is designed to operate in a wide range of substation ambient
temperatures. For this purpose, this relay has an automatic LCD contrast adjusting feature,
which is capable to adjust LCD contrast automatically according to the ambient temperature.

202 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

2. Setting the date and time of the protective device

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.

Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item CLOCK.

In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.

To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.

3. Checking light emitting diodes (LEDs)

On power up, the green LED HEALTHY should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the protective device is healthy.

The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclosing when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.

It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

11.8 Setting The Protective Device

The customer specific values for each setting parameter have to be available. Each function
included in the relay has several setting parameters which has to be set in order to make the relay
behave as intended. A default value is provided for each parameter from factory.

All settings can be:

1. Download from a PC or laptop with tool software or remotely by SCADA. Front port
communication has to be established before the settings can be downloaded.

2. Entered manually through the local HMI

To change settings through the local HMI need a password which is +, , and - keyboard
on the front panel.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the
application-specific settings to be applied to the protection and for testing of any scheme logic
applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the protections internal programmable scheme
logic.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 203


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication

This test should only be performed where the protection is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.

It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the protections rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.

11.10 Verifying Settings by Secondary Injection

Required tools for testing of a protective device:

Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0-250V
respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.

Note!

Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for
insulation resistance test when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

An EPSON 300K printer.

PCS-9000 serials dedicated protection tester HELP2000.

At the same time, the calculated settings, substation configuration diagram, the protective device
diagram and the instruction manual is essential to test the protective device.

The relay has to be set before the testing can start. Only the functions that are used should be
tested.

The response from a test can be viewed in different ways:

204 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Binary output signals

Service values in the local HMI

A PC with tool software or SCADA or master station

All used setting groups should be tested. The user can release the functions to be tested and
prevent other functions from operation by setting the corresponding parameters. The user could
also energize the binary input [BI_BlkComm] to disable communication function to ensure that no
events are reported to remote station during the test.

The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific protection settings (i.e. both the
protections function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have
been correctly applied to the protection.

11.10.1 Insulation Test (if required)


Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.

Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Voltage transformer circuits

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.

Test method:

To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the Insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection

11.10.2 AC Measurement Check


1. Current measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked
either in the protections submenu CPU_METERING column or a portable computer connected
to the front communication port with tool software.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is 5%. However, an additional allowance must be

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 205


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

2. Voltage measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading either in the protections
submenu CPU_METERING or a portable computer connected to the front communication port
with tool software.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is 5%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

11.10.3 Print Fault Report


In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.

1. Trip event report

2. Binary input when protection devices start

3. Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start

4. Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE

5. The setting value when the protection device trips

11.10.4 On-load Checks


The objectives of the on-load checks are:

1. Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

2. Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

3. Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.

If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.

206 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.11 Final Check

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.

Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.

If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LEDs has been reset before leaving the protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 207


Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

208 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 12 Maintenance

Chapter 12 Maintenance
NARI-RELAYS numerical relay PCS-931 is designed to require no special maintenance. All
measurement and signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully
solid state. The output relays are hermetically sealed.

Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.

Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

12.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.

2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AI module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.

3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the ALM_REPORT screen on the LCD.

When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct DC power voltage is applied

Correct AC inputs are applied

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 209


Chapter 12 Maintenance

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

12.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.

Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.

The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu VERSION.

Caution!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON module, check the settings.

1) Replacing a module

Switch off the DC power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.

Warning!

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3) Replacing the AI, PWR, DSP, BI or BO module

210 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 12 Maintenance

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

After replacing the DSP module, input the application-specific setting values again.

Warning!

Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.

Warning!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the DSP module, check the settings.

Danger!

After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.

12.4 Replace Button Battery

When the voltage of button Battery on CPU board is below 2.5 volts (nominal voltage is 3 volts),
please replace the button battery to ensure internal clock of CPU board running correctly.

12.5 Cleaning

Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

12.6 Storage

The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 211


Chapter 12 Maintenance

60255-6 the storage temperature should be from -25oC to 70oC, but the temperature of from -10oC
to 40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

212 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13.1 Decommissioning

1. Switching off

To switch off the PCS-931, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.

2. Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.

Danger!

Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-931, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.

Danger!

Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.

3. Dismantling

The PCS-931 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.

Danger!

When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal

In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.

Note!

Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 213


Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

214 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 14 Manual Version History

Chapter 14 Manual Version History


In the latest version of PCS-931, several descriptions on existing features have been modified.
These are described with reference to the table listed below:

Manual History

Software Version Manual Version Source Documentation


R1.00 V1.00 PCS-931 Line Differential Relay

Modification Recorder

Manual Version Section Page No. Description of change Note


V1.00 Original release

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 215